THE FORMALANDHODAL ;
SUBJUNCTIVE 1N JOHNLYLY,  

Thesis for the Degree of FLA.
, MICHIGAN STATE COLLEGE.

E. Lavancha Holmesv . '

I945

 

IIIIIIHIIWIIIIIIIIHIHllllHlllllllllllllllilllllllllllllll

193 01841 3421 _

 

"W' . “! ".'

4 2 .‘w.-- .m' ”1'.

- n" 1 WWMVWQDQn.,.=._-.,‘Io'.

-_<- J-MWMH. ~.u

-v-‘$*‘"f""“'

dW‘u-‘O'm'. - V'- - :3‘7‘ ‘— :1""'. 73°” 33"

mmur

 

 

 

 

 

The Formal and Modal Subjunctin in John Lyly

TIC? FCRE'IAL 1mm EEODAL SUBJUHCTITE 1H JOHN LYLY

BY

1. Lnflmcha Holmes

A Thalia

Submitted to tho School of Graduate Studio: of
fliohigan State College of Agriculture and
LppllOd Science in partial fulfillment of

the requirements for the degree of
MASTER 0! ms

Dopartrrent of English

19h5

r {.ll‘lllltfll {It [ltllll' {{l l

 

’1' ‘ll
I'll!"

Introiuction

The present study of the subjunctive in the language of John Lyly
is an attempt to throw further light on the role the subjunctive has played.
and is still playing. in our language. Much of what has been written
on the subject seems dogmatic conjecture based on insufficient data.

For a long time E. A. Abbott's Shakespearian Grammar(1869) remained the
only full scale study of the language of a single Renaissance writer.

It has since been supplemented. and in fact superceded. by H. Franz's
{Shakespeare—Grammatik (1898 - 1900: 2nd ed.. 1903,3rd ed.. l92h).Willian
Iasten has surveyed the subjunctive in Elizabethan English in An Inguigy
into the Use of the Suhlunctive Hood in the English of the Elizabethan
Eggggg’(187h); and E. H. Budgen.has more recently studied the language
of Spenser in The Grammar in Spenser's Fairie queens (1936). A study
of the use of the subjunctive by Lyly. a contemp€?§ of both Shakespeare
and Spenser. should add considerably to our materials on the subjunctive.
find there are reasons to suppose. as will be presently mentioned. that
Lyly‘s use is of particular importance in any study of the early modern
subjunctive.

John Lyly is especially important for linguistic study because of
his position in English literature during the last two decades of the
sixteenth century. Born in 155M 1) he was apparently in attendance

at both Oxford and Cambridge. and for twenty-five years. starting with

 

1
) The Cambridge History of English Literature gives 1551‘ as the date of

his birth. Bond in his Introduction to the Complete Forks of John
Lzly. Vol. I. p. 1. gives 1553 or issh.

ii

Egpgues in 1579. wrote for wits. scholars. and the Queen. Euphuest the
Anatog of wit. 1579. and the sequel Enrhues and 111. nexus. 1580.

were in a sense s series of moral essays strung on the thread of s story.
in which he degined the future province of'the novel. narticularly'the
novel of manners and the novel of sentimental analysis. and. in addressink
them to women. the idle victims of the age. intuitively hit upon the great
novel reading public of the future. Lyly's eight plays mark the transition
from the crude pro-drama cf the early sixteenth century to the full-
fledged drama of Shakespeare's days. Even though. as Bond noints out.a)
his plays are more inucrta"t historically than intrinsically. they did not
lack literary merit. He demonstrated prose, by intention an ornate prose.
aesthe proner vehicle for comedy. and his plays were definitely in the

drection cf hi h comedy.

'Roth in Funhnes and in his plays Lyly's prose style is unique. All
scholars are agreed that he gave to the world its first great example of
artistic prose: The age he lived in was an age of fads. of fancies. of
disnlcy. of excessive ornamentation. Iyly deliberately set out to give
prose a form comparable to that of poetry and thereby to make it as suitable
as noetry as a vehicle for literature.' That he gave to prose a direction
opposite to its general trend. ornamentation and artifice rather than
simplicity and directness. is beside the pointl He gave it balance.
contrast. alliteration. rhyme. consonance. play on words. elaborate compar-

isons intended to be literary. etc. Yet. as Garnett points out.'e great

2 ,
) R.t.Bond. The Comnlete works of John Lyly. Introduction. Vol. I.
p. 231s

iii

deal [of what he wrote he wrote] in a clear, easy. natural and pure style.
Which;‘barring an occasional quaint word. or form. would scarcely be thought
three hundred years old." 3) ?his ornate prose style was so much an
innovation and so characteristic of Lyly that it came to be known as
'Euphueism.' from Fnrhnos. in which it was first deveIOped. For one

decade at least. 1580-1590. Euphnisn/iteetf became a raging fed. and while
the critical eye came to look upon all this ornateness with suspicion.

as is evidenced by various satirical thrusts in Shakespeardi plays. it
continued to haVu its effect on literary prose for a great many years.
For the nurpose of the stud? of the nubJunc*ive such a style is particularly
significant. Lyly traveled in the highest sephisticatéd circles. and the
basis of’his prose was undoubtedly the best collgqnial English of the '?
day, what was then thought of as standard Englis;:flhowcver Inch he may
have doctored it with erroneous notions of his own. Many of the citations
I use. esnecislly from "olumes II and III. are from dialogue in the plays:

they s‘ould therefore give a fairly shear picture of the snoken language

of the late sirteenth century. barring siifitfi Tuthuisms imposed by Lyly.

Iiscussione of the subjunctive have been numerous and in the epdning
chapter I make some attempt to survey one phase of some of the theories
prgpounded. I have found myself in disagreement with the somewhat narrow
view of Jesparsen. however much I agree with him in matters of linguistic
deveIOpment generally. who defines the subjunctive exclusively in terms of

inflectional form. I do not see much sense in constituting nodal auxiliaries,

 

3) J.F.Gnrnett. ”Eotes on 'Elizabethan Prose.“ PELA. Vol. IV. p. Ll3.

iv

which functionally are parallel to the inflectional eubJunetive. as n

eeyorete category and calling it the Iimaginative use of tense.“ I have
been much more inclined to the broader view of Sonnenechein (The Soul of
.EEEEEEE)I Pontemn (Grammar of Late nodern Englishl flood and Tense of the

English Verb.) and Gurus (gerts of Speech and Accidnnce. Syntax).wbo by

 

and large consider modal auxiliaries as functionally subjunctive. In this
widnr sense the subjunctive notion can be expressed l) by inflectional
forms. 2) by modal auxiliaries. 3) by indicative forms substituted for

9nd functioning as subjunctivee. and h) by narticlee fihich themselves
introduce the subjunctive notion. Historically, as has been pointed out
by Curme and others. "The eimnle subjunctive has for the most part been
gradually replaced by a compound form made up of a modal auxiliary . . .
and the infinitive of the verb to be conjugated. The newer connound
subjunctive forms have by virtue of the fine expressive power of those

various nodal auxiliaries more shades of meaning than the old simnle forms.”

My discussion of the subjunctive in Lyly will cover his use of
the inflectional and the nodal subjunctive and, to some extent. his use
ofsubstituted indicative forms. I am aware of Lyly‘s use of particles.
inverted order. coordinated constructions to eXpreee subjunctive notions.

but I shall not concern myself with these devices here.

For the text of lxly I have used The Completeworke of John Lyly. 3 vol§.
0
edited by R. Warwick Band from the earliest quertos. 1912. All citations
from Lyly are from this edition. Throughout the study the citations are

blanked but not enclosed in quotation marks (except in the running text);

 

h
) 6.01 Curve. Parts of Soeech and Aceidence. Pp. 32h-25.

but they are referred to specific volume and page number in parentheses
,9—
at the and. The word or pussa e in question is underetégh. Thus:

If lovers were not vortuous. thin wert t'ou uiciouo (II. MES)

 

‘13

The original toyt remains unchanged in o oiling. §ut the n.ny instances
7 Us?s freely for e= basis or othtrpurposeo. I have
not rerroduced. eFCEpt in tin cone of Toroign thrones. in order to avoid
ambiguity. ”ho manuscr pt oyrbol for a noon: consonant I ha?“ converted
into the arpr03rinte c nscnont as. 'ns' . ’men.’ 'conest.' g 'comnest.'
but I see no reason for erpending ".'snd'yt' into the full forms 'the'
and 'thnt'. In the ranting text oingl: quotation marks or: need to
enclose ci+ationn frcn lyly or other sources, verb forms under dieoueeion.

and meanin e of verb forms. Double cuotntion works are of oouroo used

flor Quitcd veterisls (other than citations) from other sources.

Iln||| I ll": 1. Pl
1‘

II

III

1?

Contents

Introducti on --------------------------- 1
The Problem of the SubJunctivo- - ---------------- 1
The Formal SubJuncttvn in John Lyly- - ------------- 1?
The Rodal Subjnnctiru in John Lyly- - - - ------------ 90
Summary- - - -------------------------- 156

Bibliography ---------------- - --------- 161

The Formal and filodal Subjunctive in John Lyly

Chapter I

THE PROBLEM or THE sunchrl’vr

It night be well in.any discussion of’the subjunctive, or of any
grammatical question for that matter. to bear in nind Ramsey's remark
that “it is the irregularities and deficiencies that make the trouble and
make the grammars." 1) Actual language never quite conforms to logical
theory; The confusion that surrounds the question of the subjunctive
can be variously accounted {cr. It may be. as Smart suggests. that one
big factor in the confusion has been the verb 'to be,’ certainly a
source of a great many irregularities in English grammar. the nodsrn
forms having come from three originally separate verbs. 2) But there
are other sscertainable factors responsible for the Confusion: the
leveling of verb forms in.English. with the consequent all but total
disappearance of the formal subjunctive. and the ironic persistence of
grammarians in continuing to think of the subjunctive in terms of fora;
the almost universal readiness again of scholars to interpret substituted
forms from other moods in terms of form: the instability of the modal
auxiliaries. weakened or shifted in their meanings. and the general
reluctance to recognize their subjunctive function: the scant attention

paid to other compensatory techniques, chiefly conjunctions and adverbial

 

1) Samuel Ramsey, The Egllsh Laws and 2511.1: Grammar, p. 222.
2) 17.x. Smart. mush Review Grammar, p. 55.

 

particles. helpful in clarifying subjunctive intentions: and, finally,
the difficulties. naturally inherent in the subject. of discriminating
clearly the categories of hypothetical action and state. In the present
study I am confining myself to the formal and nodal subjunctive in Lyly.
But what is needed of course is a thoroughgoing investigation of the
whole question of the subjunctive in the light of all these conditioning

factors.

In the present chapter I shall first consider the function of the
subjunctive as viewed by some of the recent scholars and grammarians.
and secondly outline briefly my own plan of procedure in dealing with the

subjunctive in Lyly in the two following chapters.

There is fair aiéflhent among scholars and grammarians as to the
notion or notions that nood expresses. As Fowler puts it. 'mode3). . .
I§xpressei1ths relation of reality or existence as conceived by the
speaker. . . . the conceptions and affections of the nind. . . . the
different feelings of the mind.“ h) With this part of the definition
scholars and grammarians are in substantial agreement. According to
Sweet. the moods of a verb express the “different relations between subject
and predicate.I 5) Smart speaks of mood as "that property of’a verb

ehich indicates the manner in which a statement is made.“ 6) Gurus on the

 

) The Spellings 'node' and 'Iood' are about equally common.
) 11.6.Iowler. Mien Grammar. Part Iv. pp. 311-12. 315.
2; Henry Sweet. A New English Grammar. Part I. p. 105.
W.K.Smart. mush Review Grammar. p. 65.

shale agrees with Fowler. ghe moods of the verb. he says. “show the
various says in which the action or state is thought of by the speaker.” 7)
Poutsma thinks of the mood of a verb as expressing the speaker's "mental.
attitude toverds the fulfillment of the action or state expressed by

the predicate.” 3) Even Sonnenschein and.Jesperson. at odds otherwise

as to what the subjunctive is. agree here. In the words of’Jespersen.

the moods “express certain attitudes of the mind of the speaker towards

9)

the contents of the sentence.“ Ramsey alone seems xncontinced by
these explanations and insists there has been ”no satisfactory definition
of £223_cr 2222 in grammar.“ 10) It is not a definition. he continues. to
say that "the several moods are different ways in which the speaker
regards the action of Which he speaks. as related to himself.” 11) But
Ramsey. whatever he is looking for. is perhaps expecting the impossible.
By common consent. if not by formal definition. it is generally agreed
that need is the linguistic expression of the attitude of the speaker
toward the action or status indicated by the verb. is such need is
necessarily subjective in character. and its subjective character is no

doubt one of the factors responsible fer the confusion surrounding the

subject of the subjunctive.

Ho sooner do we go beyond defining the notion behind load than we

meet with disagreement among grammarians.- eke. for example. the question

 

B 6.0.Curne. 3:253:31; College Grammar, p. 55.
H. Poutsma. A Grammar of Late Modern English. Part II. p. 159.
9) Otto Jespersen. The Philosophy of Grammar. p. 313.

10) Samuel Ramsey. The E lish Lan e and E lish Grammar. PD. hhl-hz.
11) 1pm.. pp. uni-132.

 

of the means by which need is expressed. There is first the vice. held
chiefly by Jespersen. here clearly in the minority among scholars. that
mood is distinguishable by distinct forms. Jaspersen uncompromisingly
reminds us that we can speak of mood "only if[§he]attitude of’nind is
shown in the form of the verb.“ mood being” a syntactic. not a notional

12)

categoryfl It should be pointed out that in their definitions many

grammarians use language seemingly in support of Jespersen's vies.
Fowler. for example, speaks of’ncod as denoting “these forms which the

13)

verb assumes” to express the subjective attitude toward action. So

also Sweet: ”By the moods of a verb we understand grammatical forms

expressing.“ etc.;1h) burns: "Moods are the changes in the form of the

15)

verb to show.“ etc.: Poutsna: "by'nood we may understand a for: of

the finite verb or a verb-group. by means of which." etc. 16) I doubt
however that these scholars. in spite of the ambiguities of their language.
mean to hold the view that need is distinguishable by fora alone. Jesperscn.
having regard for the historical deve10pnent of language in general and

of English in particular. points out that ”the choice of a need is deter-
mined Erequently] not by the attitude of the actual speaker. but by the,
character of the clause itself and its relation to the main nexus on which
it is dependent."17) It seems a bit strange that Jespersen. aware as he

is of the increasing inflectional simplification of English and of

 

12) Otto Jespersen. The Philosophy of Grammar . p. 313.
{fig W.C.Fowler. English Grammar. Part 1?, pp. 311-12.
15) Eenry Sweet. A New English Grammar; Part I. 105.
J.0.Curne. College English Grammar. p. 55.
:5; H. Poutsma. A Grammar offiiate Modern English. Part II. p. 153.
7 Otto Jespersen.;The Philoscpgy cf Grammag, p. 313.

 

analogical assumption of functions. should recognize mood by the old tree
ditional forms only. Sonnenschein takes the sharpest issue with
Jespersen. He cautions that mood "must not be taken to involve a
difference of inflexion.“ that “such a definition would make havoc of

the moods of any language."18) Again speaking of such terms as 'case;'
'tense.’ and 'mood.’ he says “It is impossible to frame a definition of
such terms on the basis of distinctions in.£gzg, They are essentially
terms of syntax: that is to say. they denote categories of meaning.

19) '

not categories of form:'

Grammarians are likewise in disagreement. though the lack of
agreement is here perhaps more apnarent than real. as to the number of
moods we have in English. Most scholars recognize or imply two moods be-
yond the imperative and infinitive moods.20) These two are the indicative
and subjunctive moods. So Jespersen. Sweet. Curse. Ramsey, Onions.

Smart. Poutsma. Sonnenschein. though they draw the line variously between
the two. Fowler however recognizes three noods beside the imperative
and the infinitive: the indicative. the subjunctive. and the potential. 21)

But. he explains. mood distinctions by inflectionsl forms are very

slight in English. Indeed.ho goes farther and points out the ever present

 

ig; LA. Sonnenschsin. A New English Granular. Part III. Preface. p. h.

20) Ibide. p. 3.

Although scholars generally recognize an imperative mood. they are
not at all agreed in recognising an infinitive mood. In the
present study we are not concerned.sith either. except indirectly
with the imperative. insofar as the subjunctive notionally
parallels it. and shall say no more about them.

21) W.C.Tow1er. English Grammar. Part IV. pp. 311-12.

discrepancy between notional distinctions and linguistic facts. ”Not
only languages differ as to the number of modes which. by general
consent. are attributed to then, but grammsriens differ as to the number
of nodes which should be attributed to the same language. As modes repréfit
the conceptions and affections of the mind. they might be as varied and
extended as these affections.‘ ?2) At the other extreme scholars seem to
treat the subjunctive, as it were. on sufferance. It is only a nuisance
at best. since its lines of demarkations are so vague. and I have n
feeling that they would like to be rid of it altogether and be able to
speak of only one mood. Such is the attitude of most of the current
handbooks in use in schools. although ironically they religiously pre-

scribe certain surviving inflectional subjunctive forms in certain

stereotyped idioms.

The difficulty is in part due to the historical evolution which the
Indo-European languages, including English, have undergone. In their
earlier stages languages indicated nood distinctions more largely by
means of inflectional variations. As leveling erased these distinctions,
the moods were thought of as leveled also. as though mood could not exist
except in distinctive forms. The Old English subjunctive. for example.
corresponded to an earlier cptative and subjunctive. The term
'subjunctive,‘ as used today. is. as several scholars have pointed out.

a misnoncr. Taken over from the letin subjunctivus of the Roman
graemArians. from the verb subjuggcre meaning 'to subjein.’ it originally

2 )
meant "proper to be subjoinedfi (i.e.. used in dependent clauses) 3 and

 

2
:3; Ibid.. p. 315.
C.T.Onions. An Advanced English §zgtax. p. llh.

was so called ”because the tenses of the subjunctive node[here]generally
subjoined to other verbs.” 2h) For a time a parallel tern 'conJunctive.‘
with the same meaning. was current among some grammarians. As new used
the term 'subjunctive‘ includes certain verbs or verb forms in independent
statements as well - verbs that were earlier called. when mood distinctions
by means of inflectional variations were clearer. optatives. In other
words. the present 'subjunctive‘ includes an earlier ootative mood and

an earlier subjunctive (or conjunctive) mood. Many scholars. as for
example Curme. get around the difficulty by speaking of the subjunctive

as either ootetive or potential (corresponding to Fowler's subjunctive
and potential moods). The historical difficulty is a real factor

in the confusion.» grammarians. trained to accent linguistic fact. have
accepted the leveling formally (that is. as regards inflectional

variation) of mood distinctions: but they have been slow to see that mood

distinctions may continue nationally without inflectionnl signs.

The function of the subjunctive. as distinguished from the
indicative. have been variously indicated. Here we may begin with the
view expressed by Sweet. "From the point of view of moddpdistinctions.“
he states. "statements fall under two main divisions. according as they

25)

state something as a fact or only as a thought.“ corresponding to
the indicative. a fact mood. and the subjunctive. a thought mood.

Ramsey says something to the some effect: ”statements. assertions.

 

3:3 W,C,F0w19r, English Grammar. Part IV. pp. 311313-
-- ' Henry Sweet, A New English Grammar. Part I. p- 105-

 

'orediCsticns. as they are Variously called. are not all out forth as
positive farts; -- many of them are uttered hesitatingly as being

96)

supfositions. conditioned or Conditional." “ He goes on to point out
that the hesitnncy is of all degrees. that "the field occunied by the
subjunctive is so large and irregular that it is difficult to define
its limits or designate its several portions." and thet "there are so
many cases in which some other mood might be out in its place.“ 27? In
the final analysis "the choice between indicative and subjunctive
depends essentially on the question whether we conceive ourselves to

be dealing with a fact or with a supoosed possibility." 23) Jescersen
also speaks of two moods: an indicative or fact-mood and a subjunctive
or thought-mood. 29) although he goes on to say that we can speak of
mood only if there is a distinctive form of the verb. Fowler. speaking
of the subjunctive. says "It is used to denote something doubtful or
contingent. or contrary to fact" and "is commonly denoted by certain

11)

conjunctions. as if. lest. though. that. unless." “L Sonnenschein.
sneaking of the subjunctive in English. says that its "general range of
usage . . . in Old English was the same as in Latin and German "(although
it might be said that the Old English subjunctive covered a wider usage

than the Latin subjunctive) and that "its functions survive to a great

extent in English of the present day. though most of the old distinctions

 

g?) Samuel Ramsey. The English Language and English Grammar. p. huh.
:_ Ibid.. p. ”MB.
Egg '1‘b‘1"'d"'.. p. 151.
Otto Jespersen. The Philosophy of Grammar, p. 313.
33) W.C.Fowler. English Grammar. Part IV. pp. 311-12.

 

 

21)

I

of form have disupne.red." Speaking of its functions Smart says "the

subjunctive mood makes a conditional statement, expresses a Wish, or

\

Toutsma adds a further observation.

to
J-— 1

indicates doubt one uncertainty."
"The subjunctive mood igplies some psychical disposition besides the
attitude of uncertainty regarding the fulfillment of the predication.
such an volition, hope, fear, concession, etc.“ 33) Onions defines

the subjunctive as a mood of will. "In its simplest sense it expresses
desire, and all its uses Can be traced to their primary meaning, which
may be denoted by E1211 or 533312, Thus the Subiunctive is clo: ely
allied in meaning to the Imoerative." 3h) This definition seems to me
too narrow in that it limits the subjunctive to its ontative functions.
Curme's statement is probably the fullest. as it is also the host’since
it eschews all reference to formal distinctions. "The function of

the English subjunctive is to represent something, not as an actual
reality, but only as a desire, plan. demand, renuirement, eventuality,
conception, thought: sometimes with more or less bone of realization.
or. in the case of a statement, with more or loss belief: Sometimes
with little or no hope or faith. The subjunctive is also often used

of actual facts. but it represent: them as conceptions of the mind,
general principles rather than as facts.” 35) We may sum up this whole
discussion in the words of Curme. "Though the subjunctive has a number

of distinct functions," he says. "they are all united in a higher unity -

 

 

 

 

 

l1; E.A §.Sonnenschein, A New Enelish.3ramnnr, Part III, Preface, p. h.
3;) 2.x Smart, nfll‘sfi inflow Tlsmmwr,‘p. by.
3fi) . outsma, A Gr annar of Late nodern English. Part II, p. 10.
r) C. T.Onions. An navanced English Syntax, p. 11”.
3) G. O. Curme. Svntax, pp. 390-91.

10

they all reoreefnt the ecti§n or state as a Concention of the mind rather

,
7
then as a reality." ,6)

It has been difficult for many years to distinguish clearly the
indicative and the subjunctive moods in English because so few of the
older infloctional distinguishing forms have survived. In other times the
situation was quite otherwise. "From the earliest ages that we know
of,“ says Ramsey, ”certain forms of the verb have been aosigned to these
timid hesitating utterances, but . . . it has been found difficult or in-
possihle to keep these duhitative forms of the verb clearly distinguished

« 37)

in form and application. The verb, whether indicative or subjunctive.

rarely has a separate form. and the few distinctions that do survive,

38)

however desirable, are likely to pass away. Jespereen of course is

insistent on recognizing the subjunctive only when and if the verb has
'20}
a distinct lore. ”’ Even Fowler. as a rule quite sensible about the

Whole matter. is ambiguous and misleading. “The only tfifih subjunctive

inflection," he says. ”is that of were and wort , as opposed to the

 

indicative forms wee and nest. If he speak as Opposed to if he speaks
is characterized by a negative sign only. and consequently is no true
example of a subjunctive. 23, as Opposed to is, in the sentence

if it be so, is on uninflected word used in a limited sense, and con-

‘

seouently no true example of the subjunctive.” This statement is

_____

ggg Ihid.. p. 301.
Samuel Ramsey, The hnglieh Language and English Grammar, n. huh.
2:; W.C.Fowler, inglish Grammar, Part TV: on. 313-1”.
£0) Otto Jaspersen, The Ehilosoo:y of Grammar, p. 31}.
W.C.?owler, English Grammar, Part IV, pp. 313-1”.

 

 

11

misleading because. while he is here speaking of formal distinctions.

he does not mean to deny subjunctive notions expressed by other means.
Sweet correctly points out that "the few distinctions that English makes
between tact-statements and thought-statements. are mainly expressed.

not by inflections. but by auxiliaries (periphrastic moods). and by
peculiar uses of tense-distinctions.” kl) Sonnenschein and Cur-e. paying
less attention to for: than to function. recognize the auxiliaries. as

well as other devices. as equivalents of the older formal subjunctive.

Of all the scholars I have read Onions is the only one who sets up
n test to determine subjunctive mood when the verb for: puzzles us
(1;g,. can be either indicate or subjunctive). In case the verb is in
the present. he suggests turning the verb in question into the third
person singular. For example. in 'It is necessary that I Egggig'here‘
we consider 'remsin' as subjunctive because it is possible to say ’It
is necessary that he gagginghere' in exactly the same kind of statement.
where 'remain' is by common consent subjunctive. in case the verb is
in past time. he suggests substituting some phrase with :252_which would
be unmistakably subjunctive. For example. we can change 'I wish I 3E2.
a violin' into 'I wish it :3£g_possible for me to have a violin' with-

out any change in meaning. he)

Since the second statement is subjunctive.
in for: as well as in function. the 'had' in the first statement is

subjunctive too.

 

xi; Henry Sweet. A Bee English Grammar. Part 1. p. 108.

C.T.0nions. An Advanced English Syntax. p. 116.

12

This test sounds logical enough as far as it goes. But can it be
applied to all types of sentences? What about questionable subjunctives
in statements introduced by conjunctions. or sentences containing
particles. or clauses with inverted order? is the subjunctive to be

limited to one or two types of idioms?

There are in fact several problems. all historical. involved in
the question of the subjunctive as it appears in English. The first is
whether the leveling of indicative and subjunctive forms at‘f’iulinates
subjunctive interpretation of surviving forms. host scholars, and
certainly most handbooks, seem to think so. But there is no reason
why such a form as the first person singular 'ride' should always be
cczidered indicative. since u n at the same time the regular develop-
nent of the Old Engllsh subjunctive. Actually the plural form 'ride.‘
usually again interpreted as indicative. is more properly the develop-
nent of the subjunctive (the Old English ending - 3th having been
replaced by the subjunctive ending - 23 in the early middle English

period).

A second problels is whether auxiliaries are subjunctive or not;
Certainly many of the: have in certain idioms lost any neaning of their
own and become purely symbolic of the attitude of the speaker. though
in other instances they have retained something of their fuller meaning.
Certainly there is evidence in 13ny that these colorless particles plus
the infinitive perform exactly the function expressed by the older
inflected subjunctive. When Jaspersen denies their sub junctive function

and puts them in a separate category which he calls “the imaginative

13

use of the tenses.“ he is really not solving the problem at all.

A third.problen is whether indicative substitutions for earlier
subjunctive ferns have meant a shift from the subjunctive to the
indicative function. Here virtually all grammarians. even Cums. answer
in the affirmative. Bum whether I say"if I were rich' or 'if I was
rich.’ the fact is that the statement remains a condition. for the
accent apparently beyond realisation. There are plenty of other
instances in the development of our language of the analogical assumption
of function. he need to consider the possibility. in view of the
decreasing importance of inflection variations. that indicative ferns

could take over subjunctive functions.

I!

It remains to indicate. before I present my materials in detail.
my own procedure in the study of the subjunctive in hyly. Taking my
cues largely from Sonnenschein and Curse. I consider as subjunctivee
verbs or verb phrases which hypothesize or assume an action or state
that is desirable. possible. obligatory. strongly suggested. permissible.
conditional. or waived. in all instances more or less doubtful of

realization.“

I shall consider the formal and the nodal subjunctive in nyly.
devoting a chapter to each. in independent and dependent statements.
By the formal of inflectional subjunctive I mean the inflectionally
modified verb form. I include here the verbs 'to be,’ 'to have.‘ and

'to do.‘ These three verbs. while at tines auxiliaries. are at other times

1h

full verbs. and even when they are used as auiiliaries they admit of
distinct subjunctive inflectional modification. By the modal sub-
junctive I mean subjunctive statements involving the modal auxiliaries
’may.' 'shall.’ 'will.’ 'can.’ ’must.‘ 'might.‘ 'should.‘ 'would.'
'could.' 'durst.‘ and 'let.‘ With 'will' and ’shall‘ I am concerned
only as they appear in conditional or concessivefoccasionally in other
dependent) statements. I am not concerned with then as they appear in
independent statements to express futurity or determination (according

to the traditional theories of their use).

I have set up three categories of the subjunctive. with various
sub~categories. which obtain alike in the formal and medal and in
independent and dependent statements: the subjunctive of wish. the
subjunctive of potentiality. and the subjunctive of obligation. The
term 'potentiality.‘ or 'potential.‘ is not without ambiguity. but I
use it for want of a better and because it is a term widely used in
such discussions. In a sense all subjunctives represent potential
action as distinguished from action that is real or factual (indicative).
In the case of the modal subjunctive the term also covers a special kind
of potentiality. expressing capacity or capability. in 'can' and 'could'
statements. for which there never was a formal equivalent in English. I
use the term 'potentiality' as a sort of omnibus category to cover
subjunctive usage (including the special kind with'can' and 'could’)

not treated in separate and more specific categories.

Furthermore I have set up two additional categories each. not

paralleled. for the subjunctive in independent and dependent statements:

15

for independent statements the subjunctive of exhortation and the sub-
junctive of permission; and for dependent statements the subjunctive of
condition and the subjunctive of concession. The subjunctive of condition
night more logically be included under the subjunctive of potentiality.
The conclusions in conditional statements are matters of contingency and
properly considered under the subjunctive of potentiality in independent
statements. But it seemed best to consider the subjunctive of condition
separately. Throughout the study I have kept in mind constantly the

varying shadings from realizable actions or states to unrealisable.

Perhaps my plan of treatment will appear more clearly in outline
form. It should be kept in mind that I shall devote a chapter each to
the fbrmal and the nodal. considering in each case independent and
dependent usages. but here. to avoid.unnecessary repetition. I tslescoPe

somewhat.

pg; formal and nodal subjunctive in independent statements
1 In statements of wish (in prayers. imprecations. greeting?
2 In statements of potentiality (in conclusions to conditions
and. in the case of the modal. in ’can' and ’could' constructions)
3 In statements of obligation (in weakened commands and in
statements of‘noral or logical necessity)
h In statements of exhortation

5 In statements of permission

The formal and nodal subjunctive in dependent statements
I In statements of wish (in prayers and inprecations)

2 In statements of potentiality (in noun. adverbial. adjectival

16

clauses. all of various kinds. and. in the case of the modal.

in 'can' and 'couldfi clauses)
3 In statements of obligation (in weakened commands. statements

of moral and logical necessity. legal (and quasi-legal) formulas)
M In statements of condition (from real to unreal)

5 In statements of concession

17

Chapter II

THE FORMAL SUBJUNC‘I‘IVE IN JOHN LYLY

A In Independent fitatements

 

The formal subjunctive occurs in.Lyly in independent statements in
five categories: in statements of wish. in statements of potentiality.
in statements of obligation. in statements of cxhortation. and in state-

ments of permission.
lIn statements of wish

Wishes are thought of a) as capable of fulfillment (that is. the
fulfillment. being projected into the future. is still possible) or

b) asincapable or doubtful of fulfillment.

N

a) Wishes still possible of fulfillment occur in the form of prayers.
imprecations. greetings. etc.. and.may in Lyly be expressed by the

present subjunctive of the verb.

Brayers are very common as they are still today. The subject of
the verb is deity or some equivalent. Such prayers are in the third
person. and curiously enough they are not addressed directly to deity.
The corresponding modal equivalent is ’may' plus the infinitive of the
verb.

But God shields Lucille. that thou shouldest be so carelesse of thine
honour as to commit the stats thereoff to a stranger (1.221)
God blesse thee. and I blesse thee (II. 17)

The heavens guide you. your Maieetie gouernes vs (I.h26)
0h since that shoees the secret sweets of all./ The heaven of heavens.

 

18

with hevenly pours preserve thee (III. hTB)

I say. Madam. then the Gods sends mee a womans hate (III. 7h)

God pardon me. I was about to show/ my transformation! peace thy cons
againe (III. 377) A

Fortune gives your fairs necks this lace to seare./ God gzgunte a
heavier yoake itt never bears (I. 501)

from the heires of shoes incest. use will say that which you cannot
abide. Good Lord deliver vs (III. #13)

The Gods shield use from such a fine fellows. whose words melt site
like care (11. 335)

God sans the Queens: why it is the Que which they take from the mouthes

“ o? all'traytors (III. hos-9)

and as I tender thy safetie. so God deals vith my souls (II. 17)

Such subjunctives are very common in Lyly. and I have citations
involving such other verbs as 'ley.‘ 'forgive.‘ 'help.’ 'emend.‘

'fofbid.‘ 'abiurs.’ 'forfend.’ 'gend,' 'give.’ etc.

It should be pointed out that s similar subjunctive of prayer
occurs also after a relative pronoun in dependent statements referring
to deity.

And so I leave thee. not to thy self. but to his yt eads thee. who
’ggid thee with his grace. whether thou go as thou wouldest. or

tarry(II. 27) ,
Committing your Ladiships to the Alsightis. who araunt you.all you
vould have (11. 10)

The question is raised at this point as to whether these locutions
are subjunctives or imperatives. The close relation of the imperative and
the subjunctive notions is something that has troubled grammarians. Some
cue can be had from the locutione themselves. They fall into three
groups according to the character of the direct object: 1) those with
a first person object ('God forgive se.‘ I.h?9): 2) those with a second
person object ('God.blesse thee.“ 11.17): and 3) those with a third

person object ('God shield Lucille.‘ 1,221). Locutions with a second

1s

person object. as 'God blesse thee,‘ are definitely subjunctive: 'God'
cannot in.euch instances be considered as vocative since 'you.‘ the
omitted subject of the resulting imperative. is impossible. With a
first or third person object the line of demarcation is not always so
clear. It is true that when the apoerent subject cannot be considered
a vocativs (as. in 'The Gods shield ne.‘ II. 335. 'Then love and Hymen
blesse ne,‘ III, 257, 'The gods sende nee e womens hate,‘ III. 7h) the
locution is fairly definitely e subjunctive. But in many instances the
line is not so clear. The lack of punctuation. in.Lyiy3 obscures the
drawing of a clear distinction. Fer exsmpls. 'God forgive ne.’ and 'God
shields Lucille.’ with first and third person objects. are. as they
stand. without punctuation, subjunctivos. but if a comma is placed
after ‘God' in either citation. the statement becomes an imperative, s

prayer addressed directly to the diety, as ‘God. forgive me.‘

Sonnenschein points out that the imperative expresses what is
desired by the speaker no commands. requests. entreeties. and wishes. 1)
Are not these notions all contained in our conception of the subjunctive!
neither the imperatives nor the subjunctives give any assurance that the
demandaureouest, etc.. will be fulfilled: they Just suggest possibility.
The forms like 'God sendt' 'God ehield,’ etc.. are the conventional
subjunctive forms. but in the other citations the case is not so clear v

thus unless we establish an imperative subjunctive. as suggested by Curne

and Hele.3) prayers since they express uncertainty must be classified

 

1) E. A.,Sonnensdhein, A New hEnglieh Grammar. Part II. pp. 61-71.

G. OJ‘urme,S tax, p.
3) William Gars ale. "fhe Harmonizing of Grammatical Romancleture

with Especial Reference to hood-Svnt&1.,' PMLA. Vol.XXVI (1911). p. 399.
_) _

20

as subjunctives of wish.

Frequently nyly expresses prayers or wishes. in inverted order.
by the subjunctive of the verb 'to be ‘ with a past participle (forming
the present passive ) or an adjective. 'May,’ with a change in word

order (fmay' I subject { verb). forms the corresponding modal eouivalent.

Honoured bee nightie Cupid, that makes no love (III. 328)

So blessed be Apollo, Quiet be Lesbos. h nie be Nydas: and to begin
this solemnitie. let vs sing to Apollo 11!. 161)

Blast be the hand that made so happy wound (III. 258)

Praised be hir linphs. with whom she decks the woods (III, R78)

Dimde be the sun shine of her ravishing eyes 2 (III. 270)

Here I yeelde all the flockes of these fields to your highnes: greens
bg_ths grease where you treads (1. RTS)

Blacks be the Ivory of her tysing face (111. 270)

Sometimes imprecations follow the preceding pattern for prayers,
Curiously l have relatively few examples.
Cursed bee that man that engraveth any Images, it is an ab onination
before the Lords (I. 295)
Curst be Vtopia tor'Pandoraes sake : (III. 286) .
Is this a Iyren. and thou Vlissesl Cursed.be that hellish carkas (111.323)

Curs'd be the soules that thinks her any wrong 3 (1. hi?)
Ac'cu" rae"d""b' so thou Phillida. if thy love be not so : (II. Iqo)

Every vnbeleeuer shall dye in his incredulitie. Egg_bg.to those that
bee loose in heart (I. 295)

Comon greetings. such as. ’farewell.‘ 'welcons.’ etc., express
wish and were no doubt originally subjunctive. Such greetings have as
their prise object the expression of a whish whose life span exists
usually only for the moment of conveying the wish. Greetings do not

have nodal equivalents.

21

l

Come death. and welcome death when nature cannot resist. because «
necessity ruleth. nor deferre because destenie hasteth (II. h65) ‘iiQ
Farewell the sweets delights of life. and welcome nows the bitter

pangs of death (II. h65) §§
And so farewell good Philantus and well shall thou fare if thou follows (5
the counsell of Euphues (II. 188)
ferawell.neighbours. God.knowes when we shall meets againe 3 (III. 11h) ~3‘é
farewell Syracuse. vnworthyASapho be here. vnlikely to harbour any (II.hl5),«
Farewell Rhetoricke. farewell Philosonhis. farewell all learninge which
3 not spronge from the. bowl-ole of the holy Bl'iu'b'le (I. 287)
Tush. let me alone i Ile begin to them. Maisters God speeds you (111.57)
God speed. good mother (III. 216)
I will to Prisius - I cannot be quiet - and in good time I meet him.
Good morow. neighbor (III. 220)
Farewell. EgggééyTime: are you not gone 1 (I. h93)
Whatever the interpretation of 'come death' in the first citation.
'welcome death.‘ or the later expanded form 'welcome be death.‘ is
a subjunctive of wish. a greeting expressing pleasure at the coming of
something greatly desired. The Shorter Oxford Dictionagy states that
the intransitive 'welcome' was current in Old English “serving as an
h)

expression fiof good will or pleasure at the coming of a person.“

'Fasswell' expresses a greeting which exists for a relatively
short period of time. but it may also mean 'enough of.‘ Uyld explains
that 'farewsll' as an interjection made up of 'fare.' an intransitive
verb. and 'well.‘ an adverb. expressing a parting wish equivalent to
'may you prosper.’ 'good-bye.‘ The phrase ’farewell to‘ also means
'enough of.‘ 'no more of.‘ 5) In'Farewell Rhetoridke.‘ 'Farewell Syrao
cusa.‘ and similar instances. the meaning is 'enough of.‘ while in ‘fsre-
well good Philantus.‘ 'farewell. neighbours.‘ and similar ones. the

interjection is simply'a parting wish. 'Farewell' has also come to be

 

h; Shorter Oxfbrd Dictionary. Vol. I. p. 2&05.
5 Henry Cecil Wyld. The Universal Dictionary of the English Language. p. hon.

22

I

used as a noun.

In the last citation 'Farewell. godb£3y Time' 'godbugy' is somewhat
puz'ling since one farewell greeting has already been given. Perhaps
it is merely a statement of emphatic greeting.‘ 'godbexy.‘ according to
the §£§£Q.. is another form of 'goodbye.' ”a contraction of the phrase
‘f'od be with you (or yer» 7) 'Good' has replaced 'Crod' biz analogy
with ’good night' and 'good day.l The notion that the phrase originated
in 'God buy you' is not now seriously considered.8)

There was in Lyly one citation which eXpressed a greeting. not
now generally current. by the present subjunctive form of 'to bei'

I will knows of the olde woman whether I has a maide or no. and then.
if I hes not. I must needes be a man. (Knocks at Mother Bombie's
door.) M heere (III. 191)

In the citation '311 balls Diogenes to your preper person ' (11.327)
‘haile' as a greeting is derived. not from a verb. but from an adjective
(0E hal). In 'all hate to thy peevish conditions' (II. 327) Lyly.
influenced by consideration for contrast and alliteration. coins a

greeting on the analogy of 'all haile.’

lyly frequently expresses a realizable wish by means of the finite
verb ’weuld' (with the subject 'I' frequently omitted) followed by'a clause

with an auxiliary plus an infinitive. The classification of would-clauses

 

g; A Rev Egglish Dictionagy. Vol IV. p. 7h.
8) Ibid.. ,Vol. IV. p. 292.

Ibid.. Vol. Iv. p. 292.

23

in independent statements is not in the least satisfactory. 'ifould' is
used. in the following section. to introduce wishes that are not realistic
(333.. that are more or less incapable of fulfillment). Any classification
must be made on the basis of the details of the wish in the dependent
clause. 'would.‘ in other words. is merely a preparatory word expressing
wish. But it is undoubtedly subjunctive. I am here. for the sake of
convenience. following the usual classification of realizable and un-
realiznble wishes. It is the 'would' of the independent statement.

not the details of the wish in the dependent part. that we are concerned
with here. The corresponding modal equivalent is 'would wish' or

'should wish.‘

Oh I would gentlemen would some times sequester themselves from their
own delights (I. 287)

I woulde eyther your cunning. Phao. or your fortune night by simples
prouoke my lddy to some slumber (II. hOO)

My hairihbeginneth to stands Tpright. would the boy would make an end !
(II. 2)

In sooth. me thinks the breech becomes her well; / And night it not
make their husbands fears then. / Wold all the wives in our town.night
wear them (III. 381)

I would not Euphues that thou.shouldest condemns me of rigour. in that
I seeks to asswage thy folly by reason (I. 22H )

O I woulde in repeating their vices thou couldest be as eloquent. as
in remembring them thou.oughest to be penitent (1. 25h)

If thou nothing esteeme the brynish water that falleth from nine eyes.
I would thou couldest see the warms blend that drappeth from my
hoart(II.123)

Ah (good Ladies) good. I say. for that I love you. I would yes could
a little abate that pride of your stomackes (II. 2025

would Callinachus could as well disgest thy malyce with patience. as
thou diddest disguise it with craft (n. 18)

Lbld he could.colour the life with feature (11.339)

But would I might once againe see thee heere. vnto whome thou.ehalt be
no lesse welcome. then to thy best friends (II. 222)

You weeps rose water. when you asks. and spitte vinegar. when you.have
obtained. that would zgu.now with new arrowes t (II. hOS)

would zon.that Cynthia should mistrust him. or be iealous of him without
colour! (111.30)

2b

In these citations ‘would' is used with its original meaning of
'to wish. to be willing. to desire.'It is apparently used with all persons
although most frequently with the first person singular (expressed or
omitted but understood). I have two instances with the second person
plural. but none with the second or third person singular or the first
and third persons plural. In these citations 'would' is a.past tense
fern with a.present tense function referring to the future. The present
tense formi‘till‘ can be derived from either the OE indicative or
subjunctive. The form 'would' can likewise represent the OE preterite
indicative 'woldg. woldon‘ or the preterite subjunctive (welds. wolden‘.
Indications are that 'would' in Lyly in these idioms was derived from
the CE subjunctive preterite. 'would.' the finite vdrb. occurs equally

as frequently in iyly as 'would.‘ the nodal auxiliary.

Wishes are frequently expressed in Lyly by 'had‘ (z 'would')
a
plus an infinitive or a noun cgluse. The idiom regularly involves

'rather.' 'bettsr.‘ ’as lief.' or equivalents.

Euph'es had rather lye shébt in a Ladyes casket. then open in a Schollers
study (11. 9)
In hunting I had as liefe stand at the reoeite. as at the loosing (11.176!
I had rather have the earthes guttes. then the noones braines (III. 118)
And since I an at myne own choyce eyther to talks of love or of
learning. I had rather for this tyne be deemed an unthrift in re-
iecting profit. then a Stoicke in renouncing pleasure (I. 201)
For wise men.though they smart a uhile. had lever to learn experience
at the last. than never (III. #51)
I had as liefe Philautus have a wound that inwardly night lyghtly
grieve no. then a scar that outwardly should greatly shame as (II. 1M6)
If alwayes she want one when she hath as. I had as liefe she should
want me too (II. 62)
For I had rather thou shouldest leads a lyfe to thine owns lykeings in
earthe(I. 230)

 

25

In these citations 'had rather.‘ etc.. raises two troublesome
overlapping questions. What is the equivalent of 'hed rether' and 'I'd
rather'?, Ie ’had' a finite Verb or a tense auxiliary? Usually 'had
tether’ 18 considered as originally equivalent to 'would rather' 3 by con-
traction ‘would rather' became 'I'd rather.’ and 'I'd rather' leter.again
was eXpended to 'had rather.‘ Since ’rather' is an adverb. 'had' must
be a finite verb and as such I consider it here. Oneegremmarian says
that 'had better’ and 'had rather' are often held to be ungrammaticel.
but that 'hid' in 'had as lief' or 'had liefer’ was in early'ihglieh a
past subjunctive form of 'have' meaning ’to hold‘ or 'to consider.’
while 'liefer’ meant 'prefersbly' or ’better.' and from this came the
form 'had better.‘ 4| '%uld rather' and 'wonld better' ere artifice).
creations based on “had rather' and 'had better.‘ Among the best writers
usage is divided between 'had rather“ and 'would rather,‘ while the use
of 'would better' is limited. ’Jespereen on the question of 'I'd' remarks
that 'hed' and 'would' in their weekly stressed forms are identical in
the spoken languagel 'I'd.’ ‘we'd.’ etc.. may be expanded either as
'I hed' or as 'I would.‘ etc.10;.H.Leonard. quoting from Professor
Lounebury. states that 'hed rather' is one of the most peculiar of all
English idioms. ?he original orpreseion 'He were liefer' which had

been in one for over two hundred years, was replaced in the fifteenth

century by 'had rather.’ which conveyed the original idea in new form.

 

)
9 GtH.ficKnight. T.B.Haber. and W.w;Katfield. 5 Grammar of Living

10) English. Pp. 251-910
Otto Jespereen. A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles.
Part IV. :00 3210 A

d

X

i§. In the eighteenth century the use of 'had rather' was attacked.nainly
‘3 on the theory that the prepsr form was 'would rather‘ end that the

§ contracted form 'I'd rather' had been erroneously expanded into 'I
had rather.' Later this last notion was corrected and 'had rather'
has beenAin accepted literary use from an early period. In spite of

this recent endorsement of 'had rather' the newer phrase 'would rather'

11)
is gaining in modern favor.

b) Wishes doubtful or impossible of fulfillment occur after the finite
verb 'would.’ As I pointed out in the preceding section. I follow

the conventional clasSification merely for the .seks of convenience.
Lyly has numerous instances of unrealisable wish exoreesed by means
of the finite verb 'would' followed by a clause wdth either a past

tense or a past perfect tense.

I woulde Philantus were of thy minds to forsake his youthfull course
(I. 322)
But I leave to name thy sinnss. which no Syphers can number. and I
would I were as free from the inflZection of some of then. as I am
far from the reckoning of all of them (II. 89)
I would I were a chimney for your sake (III. 360)
And I woulds thye were all. which is to much (I. 307)
I would it were come to the grasp. we would show them an Irish tricks
{111. £00) mu,
in the means season. would I wer either again in Italy. or how-in England
(II. 33)
Hey he Iwould I were a witch. that I might be a Dutchssse (III. 190
Ah my Lucille. wold thou.wert either fairs or I more fortunate ---(I. 209}
I would thou.wert hanged for waking us (III. 357)
My eye would every object were a crowns (III. 239)
0 would I did flatter thee. and that fortune would not flatter me (II.h6l)
O monstrous mouth 1 I would then it had been a sheepes eyes. and a
neates tong“! (III. 120)

 

11
)Mary Hall Leonard. Greener .d Its Reasons. pp. 267-271.

27

If this he love. I wogtde it had never beene devised (II.1:h7)
I woulde it had happened as they desired (II. 11)
O Camilla. woulde either thou hadst ben bred in Italy. or I in
England (II. 86)
O woulde. when I hunted his eye with my harte. hee might have seen
my hart with his eyes 3 (II. 1&5)
If thine cares be anointed with the Oyle of Syria that boreaueth
hearing. would mine eyes had bone rubbed with the sirrOp of the Coder
Tree whicr: taketh away sight (I. 213)
Would I had beans with him I ..- (II. h63)
Philautus would thou.haddest neusr lived in Eaples or neuer left it (II. 89)
Ah Camilla would.eyther I had bene born without eyes not to see thy
beautie. or with-out care not to hears thy wit (II. 107)
Frequently the main verb and subJect are entirely omitted and we
have left only the details of the wish in the dependent statement; as
'01: that his Love Eurymine were found' (III. 382). See flp 4.4 for further

such subjunctives usin elliptical wishes.

he mentioned under realizable wishes. 'would' as a finite verb
retains its original meaning 'to wish. to be willing. to desire.‘ It
is coherently used with all persons. but here again most frequently with
the first person singulariwith ‘1' GXpreBSOd or omitted but understood).
I have one citation with the third person singular. but none with the
second person singular. or with the first. second. or third persons

plural e
2 In statements of potentiality

The subjunctive of potentiality expresses likely or possible action
or status that is conceived as having occurred. as occurring now. or as
occurring in the future in the course of events. In a sense. by definition.
all subjunctives are potential since they represent not actual but

hypothetical action or status. In a more restricted sense the present

\ 28

Category includes all subjunctives not otherwise motivated; that is. it
excludes subjunctivos for which other categories have been specifically
set up {subjunctives of wish, of obligation. of exhorna ion, of per-
mission). In the main the independent statements with the potent-1211
subjunctive are conclusionfito conditions. and Just as these can he
grouped roughly as realizable and unrealizable conditions the subjunctivo
’of potnntiality may be considered as a) realizable and b) unrealizéblc.
Nodal equivalents were already in Lyly very frequnnt. and indeed the
semantic variety is frequently more clearly differentiated by means of

the modal subjunctive.

a) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in Lyly in statements
expressing the likelihood of a.preaent or future action resulting from.
consequential to. or contingent on a present or future condition. In
other words. in conclusion: following realizable conditions. I shall

consider first verbs other than 'to be' and than the form 'wcrol'

I have only two clear out instances of the formal present subjunctive
of verbs other than 'to be.‘ Both passages can of course be interpreted
as subjunctives of prayer.

If they ghancc to part in this case. 904 send them merry meeting (111,353)

God save you.faire Ladies all: and tor my part. if ever I be brought to
answers my sinnoan God forgive no my charting. and lay vsurio to my

charge (I. 1499)
There are in Lyly howevcr innumerable instances of the common
form of the vorb (historically either the indicativc or oubjunctivc) in
such conclusions. The verb is usually interproted an indicativo in the

present tons. with present or future moaning. The clone notional

connoction of the futuro indicativo with tho oubjunctivc is obvious of
course. and I cannot holo fooling the idiom carries a distinct cub.

Junctivo notion.

but I pray thoo goo at your boot loycuro. for Cynthia beginneth to
rise. and if she discouor our love we both perish. for nothing
plcaoeth her but the faircnccso of virginitic (III. 5h)

I have forsaken all other fortunes to follow. Cyntbia. and hocre ;
ctando ready to die if it please Cynthia (111. 7b)

If he be cleanly. then.jggmc the; him proudo (1, 25h)

If Eaturo bears no sway. why vse zou.thic adulation? (I. 192)

If their Prince dye. the; know not how to live (II. k5)

If in ovory part it seems not olyko. zou.know that it is not for him
that fashionoth the choc. to make the graino of the leather (II. 12)

if thou coke whose aonnc I am 3110. I coke thee whose conno I am not
(I, 186)

and if thou.make of thy self abouo reason tho: laugh at it (II. 119)

There boo manyo moateo which are cowrc in tho mouth and chorpc in the
nave. but if thou.ninglo them wyth cveete sauces, thcygyeeldoo-'
nourishment“. 313)

the subtill Fore may well be beaten. but noucr broken from stealing hi:
pray. if you povndo opicoc thel smell the ”motor ---(I. 191)

And so was rest in Good caao if you rest well content (11. 359)

Fair faces hero no fruiteo. if they haw. no witnesses (II. 382)

If they lyko writings the: road them often (11. 122)

If(chc hayo doaltc hardoly with no. why extoll_zou co mucho my birth?

I. 192

If Haturo wild than do attend on no, / But little ccrvicc have I

to commaund --(III. 2h6)

In two passages the perfect tense is used instead of the present.

You.hawo caught a Frag. i! I be not deceived. and thorforo no good it
wore not to hurt him. as not to act him (11. 173)
If exocrionco have not taughtc you this. you.havc lzzgd long and
learned lyttle (I, 193)
Clear instances of tho formal subjunctive in ouch otatomentc are
rare because Lyly definitely prefers. as we do today. the nodal

subjunctive or indicative forms. I list hero a few passages with

indicative substitutions.

Howe fonds art thou.if thou doo not beleeue it? (III. 52)

It therefore man rather then he would have no God doe worship a stone.
how much more art thou.du11sr then a stone which gosst against the
opinion of all men (I. 293)

Sleeps woulde dos thee more good then speech: the Moons hearsth thee
not. or if shes doe. regardeth thee not (III. 23)

This green nosegaie I {Ehre my boy hath smelt to. for if he get but
a penny in his purse. he turnes it sodainly into Argentun potabile
(III. 188) a

If he some short of their religion. why he is but a colds Protestant
(III. 396-97)

If one have either the giftss of Fortune . as greats riches. or of
nature. as seenely personage. hee is to bee dispised in respect of
learning (I. 269) '

I! Eature works the effects. what booteth anygeducationi (I. 192)

if one argue with them boldly. then is he impudent (I. 195)

if all fall out amines. the worst is beating (III. 215)

But if there be anyone that deemeth wit not necessary to the obtayninge
of wisdone. after hee hath gotten the ways to vertue by industrye
and exercise. hee is an heriticke (I. 263)

Die Phao. Pheo die: for there is no hone if thou.bee wise; nor safetie.
if thou be fortunate (II. 383)

Ilye that vyco which is peculiar to al those of thy countrey. Ielcusie:
{or if Egon suspect-without cause. it is the next way to have cause

II. 22" -

there is nothing more swifter than time. nothings more sweeter: ...

. our lyre is long if we know how to vse it (I. 28h~85)

If wee present a single—mangle. our fault is to be excused. because
the whole worlds is become an Hodge-podge (III. 115)

Iarewsl Ladies. whose lives are subiect to many mischieues; for if
you be fairs. it is hard to be chast (III. 305)

If they be true love knots. tis vnpossible to vnknit then: if false.

I neuer tied then (II. h5g)_.

Reptuii cannot be over-reached by Swaines. himselfe is subtile; and if
Diana be overtaken b3 craft. Cugid is wise (II. MRI)

If thy lucke has. beene infortunate. it is a signs thy living hath
not been Godly (II. lug)

And because I wil not feeds you with delayes. nor that you.should
contort yourselfe with tryall. take this for a flatte annswsre. that
as yet I means not to love any. and if I doe. it is not you. and
so I leave you (II. 65)

if he touch his roabes they are turned to gold. and what is not that
toucheth him. but becommeth golds! (III. 12h-25)

If you.proohane the Scriptures. it is a pretie vit: if we but alledge
Doctors to expound then. we are wicked (III. h03)

I! was doo it not wee are vndone I"(III. 198)

Gfintleman. if you.be lesse. you are too holds. if so. too broads. in
clayming a customs. where there is no prescription (II. 10h)

These spots Gentleman are to be worne out. if you rubbe them ever with
this Lunarie (III. 653"

The finite verb 'were' is used with all persons ('wert' with the
second person singular) and both “tubers in independent statements to
express realizable potentiality or contingency. The subjunctive here
indicates an action.contingent on a condition. The preterite form
suggests a certain degree of unreality. but since the condition on
which it depdnds is still realizable it is classified here as denoting
a contingency still thought of as possible. In such statements 'were'
is equivalent to the model 'should be' or 'would be.’ With other verbs
the preterite form is impossible. Here. as clearlk'indicated in the one
citation below which has both constructions. the corresponding idiom is
modal ('should' or 'would' plus the infinitive).

1 were blessed 1r 1 might have him recovered (III. 60)

6235-31» hon: Camilla. m vsrye much to blame (II. 126)

No more words at the wedding - if the naior shuld know it. }_gggg in
danger of nine office (III. 228)

' It may be sayd Philautus. but I were then.verye vnfit for such pastimes
(II. 157)

If I should offends in the one I were to bold. if in the other too
beastly (I. 225)

The following citation is especially noteworthy since it involves
both the formal and nodal subjunctivs. parallel in function.

But if I should now go about to make amends I were then faultie in
somewhat amisss. and should shew my selfe 1yke Apolles Prentice. who
covsting to send the nose. marred the cheeks . . . (I. 32h-25)

Eote that the formal 'were' and the model ’should shew' are

exactly parallel in thought and function: clear evidence that 'were'

means 'should be' or 'would be' in such statements.

32

instances pf ‘were‘ with the third person singular are numerous.

I list first instances with subjects other than the impersonal 'it.‘

and Time wears very vngrate-ful. if it should not ever stand still.
to serue and preserue (I. hgu)
Indeed.hunting were a pleasant sport. but the dogges make such a
barking. that one cannot hears the hounds orie (III. 1h?)
if thy reasons should goe as current. than were Love no torment (II. 158)
I saie not so./ rI’hat eusrie woman causeth wos7 That were too broad] [271,614 7)
E—I would not purchase love in fee simple. a lease of two years to me
were tedious (ii-P.5/tfij)

Instances of 'were' with the impersonal 'it' are very comon in
Lyly. The predicate complement is a noun or adjective usually followed

by an if-clause. The idiom seems to imply a greater degree of unreality.

It were no namell if you knew my none (III. 3’49)
how. if I could meets with Risio. it were a world of waggery (III. 183)
Tush it were no love if it were certeyne (I. 211)
and were your elder to knows then it were not for your estates (II. ’41)

In the following passages (without the impersonal 'it') there is

likewise a greater degree of unreality.

5; case were light Hephestion. and not worthy to be called love. if
reason were a resedy or sentences could salve. that sense cannot
conceive (II. 331)

This face were faire.if it were tourned. noting that the inward
actions would make the outward favour but counterfeit (II. 61)

Indeed Rania. if flavors were not vertuous. than wert thou vicious

(11. IMS)

In the last passage 'wert‘ is definitely second person subjunctive.

Ramsey maintains that i'wert' is the only verb found exclusively in the

33

12) 13)

1h
subjunctive. Sweet and Leonard Aention 'wert‘ as subjunctive but

do not qualify it as Ramsey does.

According to the other grammarians 'wert' could be either indicative
or subjunctive. In such passages as 'Vert thou the messenger vnto
than all?’ (III. 285) and 'Eert thou once put to it?’ (III. 205). 'wert'
is indicative. Feefield states that the forms 'wast' and 'wert'
were not established until the feurtecnth century and that the '-t'
was added in analogy with ’shalt' and 'wilt.'15zhile the definite
functions of ’wast‘ and 'wert‘ were not fixed until the sixteenth
and seventeenth centuriesEG) Further Hesfield states that the forms
'wast' and 'wert' are now obsolete except that 'wert' is occasionally
considered. wrongly. as second person subjunctive.17%rom the meager

Ovidence it is apparent that Lyly used ’wert' indiscriminately as

either indicative or subjunctive.

b) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in Lyly in independent
statements of unrealistic contingency; that is. in statements orpress-
in; the liklihood of a past action resulting from. consequential to.
or contingent on a past condition contrary to fact. or its equivalent.
expressed or implied. ‘Something had been so and so if something else
had been so and so.‘ The liklihood of the event in the conclusion

ever occurring in the present or the future is nil since the action

 

 

 

iaJs§3533§:\§pggg;J on. English ngggago and English Grammar. p. M13.
13;‘S§33t?\flgggz) A Raw English Grammar. Part I. p. L26.

1 ‘Leonard}\hary Hall) Grammar and Its Reasons. pp. 193-9“.
12)rn63?lzia:\1.gg Envlish Grammar Past and Present. p. 35k.
1 3 Ibid.. p. 193. 'I
7 Ibid,. p. 35h.

in the conditien on which it depends is an unrealisable or unrealistic
assumption of something that never occurred. b‘nrealistic contingency
is as common today as it ever was. Formally it is expressed by the
form 'had' plus the perfect participle; modtlly by a preterite fern

plus the perfect infinitive.

Amerula. if you were not bitter. your name had been ill bestowed
(III. 138)

Farewell sweet Parents. yet. to be nine. vnfortunate Parents 2
hows blessed had you beans in barrennes ' how happy had I been.
if I had not Scene I (H.165)

I my selfe had bone happy. if I had bene vnfortunate (I. 261)

”I? my advise had taken place. Pzdas that now sitteth over head and
eares in crownes. had worn vpon his head many kings crownes. and
been conquerour of the world. that now is commaunder of drugs
(III. 125)

There is verie good workmanship in it. but the matter is but base.
if the stuffe had bene as good as the mold. your daughter had bene
as wise as she is beanéifuli (III 176)

Ihis is a wise answer: her going causd his coming. for if she had
nere gone. he had nere come (III. 369)

Back. Hoe arrests you at my suite for a horse. _I_I_i_g. The more
due hee I if has had erected a mare in stead of an horse. _i_._______t had
bin but a slight oversight (III. 213)

I rellacrites. if thy tongue had been turned to gold before thou
gauest our king such counsel. hydas heart had been hul ofaase.
and thy mouth of gold (III 125)

If the one had bone employed to thrift. the other to learning. it
had bone herds to coniecture (I. 195)

This “ratcatcher (as children do when any thing is found) cried.

'Hali' I’ which I denying. (he) claimed all. because he killed
the melee. and if the soles had not been destroyed. there had been
no garden (I. l$18)

lush 21st vs alone: we will persuade them that all fals out for
the best. for if vnderhande this match had bene concluded. they both
had ben coosned (III. 212)

If I had fled the polycie that Hunters doe. in catching of Hiena.
it might be also. I had now won you (II. 66)

I dare not say of an ingrateful minds. But if Pandora had been sell
advised. this dare I say. that Stesias had been sparde (III. 255)

It the stuffs had bone as good as the mold. your daughter had bone
as wise as she is beautifull (III. 176)

that . ’ell grosse meat I A racks had bene daintie (III. 203)

Alexander had never come so users the vale. had Epaninondes walkt
the walles (II. 318)

Beebe. here is no time forvs to reason. it had been best for vs
thou hadst beene most beautifull (I. MES)

35

3_In statements of obligation

The subjunctivo of obligation occurs ih.Lyly in a) weakened
commands and in b) statements of moral or logical inforenco or

preferenco.

a) The uthnnotivo of command and the imperative are closely
allied in function. and it is difficult to draw a hard and fast line.
between them. Are all commands oubjunctiva? Are some commands
imperatives t Curme states that"the function of the sthnnctivo-io
to represent something. not as an actual reality. but as formed in
the mind of the speaker as a desire. Uioh. idlition. plan. conception.
thought: something with more or loss hapo of realization. or. in the
case of a statement. with more or loss belief: sometimes with little
or no hepo or faith.'lgfio gays that the imperative in “the mood of‘
command. request. admonition. supplication. entroaty. warning.
prohibition.'19&o lists on "command or mild imperativo 'Everybody
stand up h' as request or entroaty ‘i’ou might call at the baker's
and got some bread ;’ as a warning or admonition 'You should mind
your own business 2 ’ 'You.must bohavoz‘ as a prohibition 'you.should
not do that again.'”20&urmo classifies all the above citations as
subjunctivos. In the case of nodal auxiliaries he say: that in

"You can’t do that.’ 'Yon.nunt bdhnvo.’ the form is subjunctive

21)
while the use is in the nature of an imperative.“

1;; GoOoCurme. Parts of Speech and Accidnnce, p. 227,

23) Ibido. p. 229.
21) Ibido. p. 229.
g p . Ibid-o. p. 230.

36

Sonnensehein maintains that the several moods overlap to a certain
extent. The growth of speech has been determined by practical needs
and natural associations of ideas and not by logical consistency or
completeness?) The imperative has been used from earliest Indo-
European times to express command. request. entreaty . prayer. wish.
and even supposition. The second person imperative has been comwn
to languages. but a third person imperative is found only in Latin
and Greek. translated by 'let him or them.' while a first person
imperative is peculiar to French and is translated by the sub-
Junctive or the 'let' form. as 'Kardhons.‘ 'Harch we' or 'let us
march.“ euéonnenschein gives imperative-equivalents“ (1) formed
with 'shall.‘ 'sollen.‘ or ’let.‘ 'laesenl' flange-g3 not kill.

2.3! him 32 it. i! he dares. Let us sing. (ii) The Present Subjunctive:
Konmen Sis herQoriginally 3rd person. 'let them come here.‘ but

used as a polite expression of comend in the 2nd person. 'come here'm

In the present study I shall agree with Ransey that the imperative
26)

exists only in the second person fern with the pronoun omitted and

that all other commands are subjunctives.

The imperative occurs very frequently in Lyly. There can not

be the slightest doubt about the character of the following passages.

 

2‘; LA. Sonnenschein. The Soul of Grammar. p. 57.
2?) Ibido. p. 820
25) Ibidc. p. 83.

Mai-rem. fluid... p. 8’4.

Samuel Ramsey. The mush Lagging and English Grammar. p. 1457.

37

to no r‘hilautus assure thy selfe. there is no Venus but she hath
hir Temple (II. 87)

E- ileta ' Isnena lbiileta 3 Come a ax my Lady is in a sowne! (II. 392)

Discorde. vnlose her tongue. to serue her turns ./ For in distresse
tha.§ must be her defence (III. 2hh)

Then xuphuee considerwith thy selfe what I may be. not what I
have beene (II. 117)

G_<_)_ Cmid r-tive her all the golden shafts. And she will take thee for
a forrester (111,260-61)

Seeks him deare Protea. find and e nloz his (III. 321)

Tell me my deare. when comes that‘haupy'houre. {Wereon thy love
shall guerdon my desire (III. 252)

any lane-slaw maister doth come (I I. 311)

 

The imperative with 'you' expressed in also reasonably frequent

in Lyly in subjunctivee of command.

Psyllus. eta: zpu.heere at the window. if anye enquire for me. answers.
Non lubet eese doni (II. 333)

Take thou.these few cares of corne. but let not famine so much as
smell to them (III. 30?)
Know you then sir. that this Gentleman my fellow. is called Philautus.
I Furhues (II. 37)
Now follow me ye wandring lights of heaven. and grieve not. that
she is not plast with you (111.288)
Content vou all.Learchue did the deed. And I will make it good who
ears sayes nay (III. 25L)
Hines eyes? then gouerne than my daylight care (III. 25h)
But be thou quiet Philautus. and vse those neanes that n winne
thy lone. not those that may shorten hir lyfe (11,12
Well. Epi. dine thou with him. for I had rather fast then see her
face (III. 5
Go then all feure.and slay the seuadge Boers . . . (III. 253)
pun. I pray let me stay. and bid him prepare the bane-net. gag.
Awaz. 1P. peasant {(111, 263)
V2 thou droesie God. I say (III. 356)

ourme. an exception among grammariane. maintains that the
imperative second person subject is often eXpreesed. as ‘Enter ye in
at the strait gate' (Eatthew.VII. 13) and 'I don't know what to say.

27)
horah. you.go 2' If in the first citation. 'Fnter ye.‘ the 'ye'

 

27) 0.0. Curls. College English Grammar. p. 277.

38

1. omitted. the result is a straight ingerative. In the second one
'Xorah. yoo.go.9 to omit the 'you' gives a straight imperative but

'3’!

it also gives n different meaning. Such citations es nter ye'
and JHorah. you 50' are very closely linked to the imperative. but

passages from Lyly on this gettern I consider subjunctives.

Occasionally L'ly uses a subjunctive of command with the third
person. I may say that I have no instance of his use of the sub-
Junctive with the first person singular. The few forms I have with
the first person ylursl I have listed_under the subjunctive of
exhortation. Iyly apparently preferred the let-fora in such instances.

iy cheekes? thenm id be at thy comnnnnd (III. 2L5)

New fire be turned to chilsr. ayrue to blond ./ tater to humor

' rurer then it selfe. / and earth to flesh more cleare then
Christall rock. / And Discord stand eloofe. that Concorde hands]

ey io;{ne the spirit with the flesh in league (III. 23’”)

0 my Teeth Ideare Barber sees me. Tongue. tell nee. why my Teeth
disc: as mee (I II. 136)

Locke not so strange. it is thy fathers voyoe. And this thy Love:
Atlanta now reioyce (111,305)

In one passage we find an indicative form. 'nleaseth.' to esprese
a weakened ecumend.

Hell gentleman aunswered Lucille in arguing of the shadowe. we forgo.
the substance — pleaseth it you.therefore to sit dovne to supper
(I. 201)

Tells maintains thnt imperatives are employed in the first and

third.persons and gives so examples: 'Do we all holy rites'(Shak.).

'Como. go we then together' (Ihid.), 'This be thy Just circumference.

39

28)
0 world‘ (Milton). 'Thy kingdom come' (watt. 6:10). Sonnenechoin

favonre a subjunctive of command. He states that the subjunctive of
desire which exnreaees an obligation or desire of the speaker or

somebody else often comes to be an exnression of command. of request.
, 29>
or entreaty or wish’ae/ 'Every man take care of himself.’ According

to Ramsey'e diecueeion on imperative there never was a third person

(30; 31) 32)

imperative.' nale and Curse for such a citation as '3verybody get
ready. we'll try again!’ suggest the name 'imperative subjunctive.'
Instead of the name 'inyerative subjunctive' I use subjunctive of

obligation or command.

Lyly frequently uses a straight imperative whiih is equivalent

to the ’if' clause of a conditional statement.

Ho 5 feyre Pandora. £325.}: with Bynthia. And I will love thee more
then all the rent (III. 287)
My eweete Niche 1 flie whither thou wilt all day. so I may find thee
in my nest at night. I will love thee. and beleue thee (III. 331)
Base peeaunt. humbly watch my stately lookee. and yeeld applause
to every word I annexe - Or from my service Ile diecarde thee
quite (III. 251)
Diana. restore dunid to venue. end I will for ever release the
sacrifice of Virgin: . . . (I1. RES)
Endimion continue as thou.haet begun. and thou.shalt finde that
Cynthia ehyneth not on thee in va?ne (III. 76)
Good naieter wizard. leaue these murlemewes. and tel Hapso plainly.
whether Genulo my waister. that gentle shepheard. shall win the
love of the faire shepherdese hie flock-keeoer or not. and lie
give ye a bbttell of as good whey. as ere ye laid lipe too (III. 369)
‘22_gg eweete wife. and they'ehall buy it deare (III. 273)
28) .
29) w.h. Hells. §rammer of the English Langpage. p. 102.
30) E.A. Sonnenechein. A New Inglieh Grsmfiig. Part III. p- 63-
i1) Samuel Ramsey. Egg English Language and English Grammar. pp. “57-63.
’ Villien Gardner Hale. "The Harmonizing of Gr mmatical Nomenclature.
yith Especial Reference to hood-Syntax.“ PRLA, Vol. XXVI (1911),
3?) I). 399.
(4.0. m. 8221;“. p. 1‘31“.

\

..
.;)
-

, ‘ Q Q ~ 7 ‘ ‘ . ' - I . ‘3. . ‘
hc;gfi g3 cIoke 90y, anlI neue a vling at “urtln. C tue hoore (111.926)
”-0-

11.13' fre(nently starts mith a strfidkht innerativc and flea a: ifte

to a let-clhuee. both being ugrnllel in function.

‘

 

ell. my egcod uym?h83. 1991'; lot Ceres intreat you ye '15 (III. 331)
O.rg exact Si Ma! hue tILt t‘oa uglt. and "t :31 tFy :.y9r?cctione

 

bee excu:ed by me. so tlou but an tron lane-st me (I I 331)
.’:7.' .<LaI2. arden "en: 19 an: I t n: ten: ac rzneone Ier r3 (III. 77)
.Ien. Venue. send c.ofine that showre. EHBTOW1th tr .cu.wert wont to

wash tLoge that eee thee aorehir; 5-:d 19" 1999 b9 £33 hoaxes bee -

honoured in all the world. and f9 cred. visas d for. and wondrod

at: here are thy “ "II, ”‘"

 

9f :0 r" kg,

 

ynjhe. Ceres (I Die

Blush Iphiclee and in thy Loeie cheekee/ let all the heat that feeds
tly'heart 19‘99r9 (III. 271)

Tie done: now Inn $139 on thy sweetest Eeedeg. lend as I lune. ec‘lg.
thy r9rvvunt :n9:69 (III, 376)

Itris big? t‘xe to prevent this niechiefe. Yoee. F ptune. stand to

+*9 romise. a d 19t me tece sedienl3't19 scape 0: an 011“ man

0- .J

 

v ‘g'flv‘s‘

(11.1.: .‘c.c)
*Frt were as bad. for than by contrerie you shoulde never eleege.
But 23 feline. 19‘ V3 h9*?9 th9 ende {III 7L}
3039 C. "::::9 flfi t:I;- rest. 1 t vs net be ashamed to cast our or“:
on him. on than wee fearedw not t9 csst cur dnrtoe (II. 315)

Core. lonely s;0u$e. let vs go walke the woods (III. 258)

m

 

 

h) F19 subjunctive of obligati on $3 capreesed b7 'it were' in

n \

cndent etat9ncnt3 engrossing nor; 1 or 19f .c: -l obli ration. Lucn

[-
.‘1
KS:
w

etntnfientr veu.‘?' eitr9~s nrefcrence or noral Judgrent as to procedure.

Certa’nly the subjunctive here expresses attitude toward action rather

than tire. The 313.9 ct 'it' is anticige or" of t‘9 reel subject

a

expressed in 9 {01109135 noun clause or infinitive phrase. The nodal

equivalent of 'uers' in 3.:c: instances it 'ucu d he.’

It were good that wi‘ excut tore ceremonies I tooke him. least. booing
een;ed. I be iutze-gt (III. 53}

It 9133 vnfitte that Iicmlaiees eIou‘Ida strive (II. 1953)

It were b9st then that your Ladyship give nee leaue to be mne: for I

can but eigh (II. 902)

bl

It vars good was learned.his cunning at the Cardes (II. M37)

Folly. it war to show what they saw. ssing hears-after in yo description
of England. it shall most manifostly appears (II. 35)

It were too tedious to vttsr my whole lyfo in this my Pilgrimage.
tho remembrannoo whore-off. doth nothing but double my repentannoo
(11. 2h)

It wars 5 good deeds Manes. to boats thy ma star (11. 3M5)

In my Opinion it vsrs better to sit on the round with little sass.
than to ryss and fall with great daungor (II. 178)

Thou.nrt an hoyro to fayrs lyving. that is nothing. if thon.bo
dishoritod of‘learning. for better were it to thee to onhorit
righteousnesso then riches (I. 318)

and fsrrs more ssemsly were it for thee to bare thy studdyo full of
bookos. then thy purse full of money (I. 318)

In two passages 'vert' represents 'woro it.‘

wort not a roty lost to bury him quicker (III. 265)
Gone let vsA’ogging b but wort not a world to hears then woo one
another? (III. 198)

In two passages the real subjoot is cast into the form of a
condition.
It wore an absurditio in schools. if one being vrged with a place
in Aristotlo could find none other shifts (I. 299)

It wsro s shame if s.nayden should be n.sutor (a thing hated in
that sex) that thou.shouldost donis to be her serunnt (ll. h50)

 

 

In the following passAgo a third person subject Other than 'it'

occurs 0

Away poenish boy. a roddo wors bsttor undsr thy girdls. than lovo
in thy mouth (III. 3“)

Frequently the impersonal 'it' is omitted and the infinitive

takss its place as the formal subJoot of tho vorh.

142

to appoint but one. were as he knew iniury (II. 23)

to deride equally. were ~to have no hoire. . . (II. 23)

to impart more to one then to y °other. were partiality (II. 23)

To make them lone were a reuenge too gentle fer Cupid (III. 319)

Gintlewoman. to etudie for a eeoonde wife before I known my first.
were to reeemble the good Huswife in Naples . . . (II. 175)

I am as farre from malice. as you from lone. & to nietake of purpoee.
were to nielike of peeuiehnee (II. MOO)

Tb” lone onely for comelyneeee. were luet (II. 71)

To _5;!g reason for fanoie were to weighe the fire. and measure the
winde (I. 2&5)

To tnlke of other thingee in that Court. war to bring Eggee after

—app""'1u (II. 216)

There are four passages that I have no adequate eXplanation for.

Then we were best be going whilest every one ie plea-d (III. 228)
lue.Hanee will it bet] Manes. Bel he were beet be as cunning an
a Doe (II. 353)
Lady your cunning mayo deceive you in fishing with an Angle. therfore
to catch him yon.wou1d have. you were best use a net (II. 17h)
but it may be your mouth is aux of State. therfore you.were beet
eeaeon it with ealt (II. 70)

So far no I know grammariane have nothing to any aboux the idiom.
It ie poeeible that it was already in Lyly'e time. or ehortly came to

be. felt as mb—etandard. A possible eXplanation night he that. 'Qe'

and.'he' here Here originally dativee.

‘43

3,1“ statements of Exhortation

The subjunctive of exhortetion occurs an a rule in the first
pereon plural no the equivalent of the imperative. The modal
equivalent is 'let ue.‘ '1et}e.' which is now infinitely more common

than the formal ethunotive. ,

She having thus diecoureed with hir selfe hir owne nieeryee. cast
hir eelfe on the bedde: and there lette hir lye, and retourne wee
to Euphuel (I. 207)

But too much of thie etring which eoundeth too much out of equare.
and returne we to Euphuee end Phileutue (II, 155)

But retourne we again. as I woulde heue tregieell and etately

etile shunned (I. 272)
And returne we to Ruphuee. who must play the last parte (II. IBM)

In the paeeage ‘Be zgu.ae etedfeet to me as Ile be to you. and
we two wil gee to the world: end'(III. 278) 'Be you!_nay‘be an
instance of the subjunctive of exhortation in the second pereon. If

the 'youF were omitted. it would be e etraight imperative.

In the paeeage 'Eel. be it knowne vnto 511 men that I haue done
thie to oornnte my mayeter° (III. 266). 'be it knowne' may be an
inetance of the subjunctive of exhortetion in the third.pereon
einguler. The model equivalent here is 'let it be known,‘ and in
fact 'let' with a third pereon ie extremely frequent in current

Englilh.

whether need with the first. second. or third person the sub-
Junotive of exhortation ie cloeely related to the imperative and the

eubjunetive of obligation.

5 In statements of permission

The formal subjunctive expressing permission is infrequent in
lyly. as is evidenced by the few enunples I have found. and has
disappeared from current English. surviving only in a few stereotyped
phrases. flh- more common expression. econ in Lyly's time. was the
model with 'may' or 'might' with the infinitive.

And come what can come. Jupiter shall proove (III. 2119)
There must be no condition. but iudge hydas. and‘zgdgg_flymphes(lll. 1h2)

An indication form. 'eufficeth.‘ occurs in two passages.

Let wonder write your vertuee story. I By them and gods muet you be
b1azed./ Sufficeth men they stand amazed (I. MSO)
whet ioies we both conceive. neither can eXpresse: eufficeth they
be. as your virtues. infinite (I. RSS)
The subjunctive in these four citations orpressee pernission
in the sense of 'to permit.' 'to allow.’ or 'to let' something take
place or not take place. The context muet be considered in determining
the classification. According to Onions 'Be it what it may' is
equivalent to ’let it be what it may.}3)The citations from Lyly may
be analysed on the basis 'nEgested by canons. 'Come what can come'
is clearly permission. 'iudge Mydas and iudge Nymphes' may be felt
to have both notions of permission and of exhortation. Both instances
with 'sufficsth' have besides permission,/dscided notions of er. I
hortation but I felt that the permission notion was the stronger. which

I
accounts for'their classification here.

 

33) 0.T.0nions. An Advanced English Syntax. pp. 63-61%

1*5

B In Dependent Statements

The formal subjunctive occurs in dependent statements in Lyly in
five categories: in statements of wish. in statements of potentiality.
in statements of obligation. in statements of c>ndition. and in state-

ments of concession.

lj'In statements of wish
I‘

he in the case of wishes in independent statements. wishes in
dependent statements can be thought of a) as capable of fulfillment and

b) as incapable or doubtful of fulfillment.

a) Wishes (and I extend the word to include prayers) that are thought
of as capable of fulfillment are wishes that project action or status
possible in the present or the future (and hence fulfillabls). and follow
such erbs as 'with.‘ 'pray.‘ ’would.’ 'hope.' 'grant.' etc. For the
present purpose 'had as lief‘ might be included in such category of verbs.

Modal equivalents are 'will' or 'would‘ plus an infinitive.

And rather doe I wish hes preserus our fans. then our lyues (II. 318-19)
Trachi. Is it not louet Pandi.If it were. what then! Trachi.fi°thing.
I but that I hepe it be not (II. 392-93)
Rather praie there bee no fall of monis. for thou.wilt then go for a
que (III. 212
I had as liefelghilautus haue a wound that inwardly might lyghtly
grieue me (III. 212)
And so farewell. and be hangd. and I pray God e fare no worse (III. 395)
Fortune gives your fairs necks this lace to wears. God grannte a
heauier yanks itt'neuer bear (I. 500)

In one passage Lyly uses 'thee' instead of ‘thou' as the subject of

the verb. Such substitution has become the regular practice in Quaker

h6

(
speech. Or the passage might be imperative. he wish thee gas with us

for companie‘(III. 377).

The auxiliary 'to be' (whether used to form the perfect tense of

herbs of motion or the passive voice) follows the some pattern.

I pray God maister be not flowne before I come (II. 3M)

I hepe you be not sotted upon the man in the Roone (III. 21)

And I hepe Philautus wyll not bee my foe. ... neither you. Father‘bgg
displeased in that Philautus is displaced (I. 231)

 

In one passage the past tense of the verb occurs after 'would.’
But it is clear from the context that ’eaw' here is practically

equivalent to ‘could see' and actually involves a realizable wish.
I would Tellus saw your amiable face (III. 62)

The form 'would' occurs as an independent verb with its original
meaning 'to wish.‘ While in form it is a preterite. it has come to be
used as a present. {I would' meaning ’I widh.’ It is so used in the
passage just given and the first of the citations to follow. In the
second citation to follow the form 'would' is perhaps in.part determined
by the sequence of tenses. In both the citations 'would' occurs in a
relative clause.

Yes. who Sooner can shedde the teares of a faythfull Loner shall obtain

anything hee would -(III. #7)

-the wolf desirious to search in the Lyons denne. that he might espye
some fault. or steals some prays. entered boldly. whom the Lyon caught
in his pawes and asked what he would! (II. h3)

The subjunctive of wish is clasely allied to the subjunctive of

command and the imperative. See below under the subjunctive of command

in dependent statements.

h?

b) wishes that are thought of as doubtful or impossible of fulfillment
are wishes that pl'OJOOt a present ction or status clearly not consonant.
for some convincing reason or other. with known redity. Ihe tense form
is invariably the preterite. but the form indicates unreality rather than
past times The most common verb form is 'were.' but other verbs occur
too. though their subjunctive character is not so apparent, since they
represent historically the indicative or subjunctive. The particulars of
the wish occur after 'would’ (in the original sense 'wish. desire') or 'wish.’
the: 'would' the first person subject is as frequently omitted as not. and
frequently the primary verb tOgether with its subject disappears altogether
(in elliptical constructions). The subject of the main verb is regularly
the first person. more frequently the singular than the plural; that of

the subjunctive in the dependent clause can be anything.
The following passages from Lyly illustrate all these various points.

I woulde Philautus were of thy minds to forsake his youthful course
(I. 3223

I woulde to God Ferardo were in this poynte lyke to Oysander. which
would not suffer his daughters to wears gorgeous apparell (I. 223)

And I woulde thys were all. which is to much (I. 307)

But here comaeth Apelles. in whom I woulde there were the like affection
(II. 3M6) t.

There is a stone in the floud of Thracii. y thosocver findeth it. is
neuer after gr sued. I would I had y stone in my mouth. or that my
body were in y River (II. 90)

14:52. But what sayest than to thy dames chafing? Egglothing. but all

' her dishes are chafing dishes. Megp. I would her tongue were in thy
belly (III. 920)

I would my bed eggs a hazard (III. 120)

I would it were in haples a law. which was a custome in Aegypt. that
woemon should alweyes go barefoote (I. 223-2h)

The example whereof I would it were nollesse profitable then y” eXperience
to me is like to be perilous (I. 212)

I would in my faee_there were neuer an eie (II. 38h)

I would it were<’- come to the grasp. we would show them an Irish tricke
(III. 5305

I woulde our diseases were all one (II. 14‘1) ,

Ah my Lucille. wold.thou wert either leeee faire or I more fortunate.
eyther I wiser or thou m?lder. either woulde I were out of this medde
noode. eyther I would we “93, both of one minde (i. 209)

I know Fhilautue we are in England. but I would we wer not (II. 150)

I would thy words were. as thy lookes are. lonely (III. 311)

In? I wngld y' gentlemen here present 322 as ready to credit my proofe

I. 20

Hey ho Iwould I were a witch . that I might be a mtchesse (III. 151;)

Call you this honking of fortunes when one can finde nothing but byrde
neetee? would I were out of these woodee. for I shall hautb but wodden
lucke (II. the

Talke no,more Teluse, your words wound. Ah. would I were no woman.3
(Ila hdg)

I! Lucille be so proude to diedayne poore Tuphues. would Funhues were
so happye to denye Lucille (I. 210)

or if lucilla be so mortyfied to lyre without lone. woulde Euehuee were
so fortunate to lyve in hate (I, 210)

Her <e'>s to the health of Steeiae my lens. tould he were here to weloore
you all three (III. 268)

0 Camilla. woulde either thou hadst hen bred in Italy. or I in England.
or wold thy vertues wer lesse then thy beautie (II. 86)

Rather in teuree. I wisfl‘he day were night (III. 333)

I wish it were so. yet I cannot thinko it is so (I. 325)

If it were for thy preferment and his amendment. I wish you were both
married (I. 322)

Faire boy or god. or what euer you bee. I would you knew these woods
are to me so wel known. that I cannot stray though I would (II. h3h-35)

wee are madde wenohee. if men marke our wordes - for when I say. I would
none cared for hone more then I. what meane I (II. 379—80)

Phil. Why should you feare? the God requireth no boy. Galla.I woulde
he did.then should I heue no fears (II. #66)

Anel.¥hat might men doe to be beleeved? Cemn.?het their tongues on their
heartes. AneLSo they doe. and Speaks as they thinks. 23332.1 would
they did I. (II. 3h6)

There is a stone in the floud of Thracia. yt whosoeuer findeth it. is
REUBT after grieuzd. I would I had yt .tone in my mouth (II. 90)

I would I had a paire of wings that I might flie after (II. hSI)

0 my Eunhuee. would I had thy wit. or thou my wil (II. 90)

would I bed some local things to dry my brain (II. 396)

wherein they shew them-selves Tresuere for others. not hordere for them-
selues. yet although it be sure enough. woulde they had it (II. 192)

In one passage in Lyly the subject of the main verb is a third

person (equivalent here however to the first person).

My eye would euery ob sot were a crown (II. 2h9)

1*9

In one passage in Lyly the notion of the main verb is expressed in
the noun equivalent of the verb.
I come not to tell the art of fishing.--‘but with a neon Fisher-mans wish
that all the hollows hearts to your haiestie were in my net (I. 1:28)
Elliptical wishes. with the main subject and verb omitted. are very
comon. in Lyly as they as at the present time.
0 that we had Sir Taphas. that bran! Squire. in the midst of our myrth.
(III. 25)
Oh that his Lone Eurymine 1‘..." found (III. 382)
O. that thy steeds 219......" wingd with my swift thoughts ((. 277)
0 that I were worthy you should be sick for me! (III. 262)
Oh that quoth Martin Chwsre a Noblszmmni (III. #20)
Occasionally there are substitutions in Lyly of an indicative for
the subjunctive form in such statements of wish.
Hy good sonne. thou art to receive by my death wealth. and by my counsel
wisdom. and I would thou wert as willing to imprint the one in thy
hart. as thou wilt be ready to bears the other in thy purse (II. 15)
O Lucille. Lucille. woulde thou wort lease fayrs or more fortunate (I. 2141:)
Ah my Lucille. wold thou wort either less fairs or I more fortunate (1.209)
'flxou addsst thou art no Italyan Lady. I answer. would thou wort (II. 132)

O Camilla. woulde either thou hadst ban bred in Italy . or I in England.
or wold thy vertues war loses then thy beautie ... (II. 86)

2 In statements of potentialig

The subjunctive of potentiality expresses likely or possible action
or status that is conceived as having occurred. as occurring now. or as
occurring in the future in the course of events. In dependent statements
the patterns involved are any; but they have this in common that the
subjunctive verb expresses likelihood of action or status without much
reference to specific time or placs or circumstance. After 'till.‘ etc.,

and after indefinite relatives the indeterminatensss of the action with

SO

respect to time and place is quite obvious. Most of these patterns have
model equivalents. and indeed the semantic variety is frequently more
clearly differentiated by the modal subjunctive. The distinction should
be kept in mind here. as in the ease of independent statements. between
realizable and unrealisable potentiality. But since most instances of
unrealizable potentiality occur in conditions. and conditional statements
are given a separate category elsewhere. the distinction need not here be

entered in the classification.

a) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in noun clauses as objects
after such verbs as ’suppose.' 'suspect.' tfear."think.' 'know.‘ etc..
or in noun clauses after correspending verbal nouns. These verbs have this
' in common that they are very subjective in meaning: It is extremely
difficult to indentify their action objectively. They are therefore
more frequently used with the first person than with the other persons.
They are in a sense preparatory verbs specifying some kind of mental
activity. and the statement of the details of the supposition. speculation.
opinion. imagining. etc... is naturally cast into the subjunctive. Negated
main verbs. particularly in the case of verbs of knowing. merely serve
to intensify the uncertainty of the details to follow. This subjunctive
occurs also frequently after verbal nouns. such as 'dispute.‘ 'choice.'
etc.. nouns expressing action. whose verb forms would fall in the category.
After the verb the conjunction is either 'that' (expressed or implied) or
'whethenfil’after verbal nouns the conjunction is usually 'whether.’
Occasionally 'if' (atwhether') appears in elace of 'whether' in a usage
since become very pepular. I shall arrange my examples from Lyly according

to specific main verbs involved. first passages that are specifically

51

subjunctive in form. than page.aee that might be historically subjunctive

as well as indicative.

But suppose thou think thy selfe in personage comely (II. 59)
Besides this SUppOse one have neither cares to heare his Ledie speake.
nor eyes to see hir beautie (II. 159)
But suppose that Eughues loue thee. that Philautus leave thee (1.206)
Angt. Take re with you. but speak eoftlie. for these reedee may have
earee. and heare ve. tenab Suppose ttez haue. yet they may be
without tongues. to bewray vs (111.1h5)
Pet. Supnoae I loue not. Pro. Sup7oee I care not (III. 326)
I know not whether they be in England morefl amorous or vertuoue (II. 91)
In this therefore I would know thy ninde whether it be convenient for
women to haunt such places where gentle‘men are (II. 170)
I feare mee faire be a word too foule for a face no passing fayre (II. 380)
xy acquaintance is not great with thy person. but such insight haue I
into thy conditions. that I fear nothing so much as that. then thou
catch the fall. where thou thinkeet to take thy rising (II. 50)
Here he comes . offend him not. Ioculo. for feare he turn thee to a
Iacke or Apes (III. 3(9)
we feare we have lead you all this while in a Labyrinth of conceitee (II. k16)
I thinke it be imooesible for Ceres to have any follow her in one hover.
that is not in lane in the next (III. 328)
which things although I think they be not true. yet can I not but lament
that they ehould be deemed to be true (1.285)
I cannot tel whether thou laugh at my folly. or lament at my phreneie (II. lhO)
I cannot tell (Camilla) whether thy ingratitude be greater or my misfortune
’(II. 132)
he. thinkee I feel an alteration in my mind (II. 1:11)
Shell it then be tollerable to denye the Scriptures haying no other colour
to areoyde an inconvenience. but by doubt‘ng whether they proceede
from the holy ghost (I. 299)
My father boardee mee alreadie. therefore I care not if your name were
Geoffrey (III. 100)
Speake. I say: who dare take offence. if thou be commaunded by Cynthia
III 75)

 

The preterite and the perfect tense are as possible in such subjunctive
statements as the present. These subjunctive: indicate action assumed (by
guess or surmise) to have taken place in past. The main verb remains in

the present(except in the last instance),

I fears the boy he runne mad with studying (III. 188)

I {hink Lucio be gone a equirelling (III. 188)

I tixinke my boy to filed away by charms (III. 39h)

I can not tell whether those things sprangg by the lewde and lying lyppes
of the ignorant (I. 285)

In vaine I fears. I beats my braines about (III. 35L)

But suppOseI glanced at some abuses (I. 325)
I fears as Cupid daunst upon the plains. I see his arrow head upon the

leaves (III. 2E2)
Indeed I think hes served some poaet to his master (III. 206)
Which Haven I supposed he hadd snoken idellie. but that he Oftsones
repeted it (I. M66)
In some few instances the preterite subjunctive suggests unreality.
The subjunctive in 'and therefore no thinketh. the time were but lost.
in pulling Hercules shooe uppon an Infants foot. or in setting Atlas burthen
on a childes ehoulder' (II. kl) suggests realizable possibility discussed
above in independent statements: it is possible that 'ne thinketh' has
weakened from a governing verb to a mere particle.“ ’Suppoee L195: a
virgins (I blush in supposing my selfe one) and under the habits of a boy
were the person of a mayde' (II. R50) and 'euppose that Callimachus had
as 11 fortune. as ever had any' (II. 29) suggest assumptions contrary
to fact.. The idiom in 'a doubtfull dispute. whether I were best to loose

my golden heard. or my bone tooth‘ (III. 135) is parallel to instances

listed above under the subjunctive of potentiality in independent statements.

In five instances indicative forms have replaced subjunctive forms

in the second or third person singular.

Amongst those trees. I do suspect hees hid (III. 3H9)

Cease your talking: for I would faine sleeps. to see if I can dreams.
whether the birds hath feathers. or the Antes wings (II. MO?)

For 10'! being license for which so many mischiefes have ben attempted.
I am not yet perswaded. whether of them was nest to blamed. but
certainly neither of then was h1amelees(II. 197-8)

Touching thy lyfe in my absence. I fears me it hath bene too loose (11.1h6)
I wel beleue thou remembrest nothing y' may doe thee good (II. 33)

b) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbial clauses
eXprsssing indeterminate time in the future after such particles as

'till.’ 'until.' 'before.’ 'ere.‘ etc.

Your fortune nay‘be good another daye/ Till fortune come take you a
books to prays (I. 50M)

and that no power can ends it. till shoe dig that did it..or the heauens
shew some meanes more then miraculous (III. 63)

now coueting to draw a glauncing sis. then a rolling. now a wincking.
stil mending it. neuer ending it. til they be caught with it(II. 358)

but I well perceius that thy fleshe Is as ranks as the woluss. who as
soone as he is stricken recouereth a skinne. but rankleth inwardly
vntill it come to the lyuer (II. 9”)

and one vertue linkss it selfe to another. vntill there be a rare
perfection (II. 165)

Stay heirs vntill I know her further pleasure (III. 252)
Any way: alls one. ils draws drie roots - if you.send not to seeks her.
you.may lye here long enough. before she come to seeks you (III. 35h)
Take you this scarfe. binds / Cupid lands and foote / So love oust asks -
you I leave before he shoots (I. 503)

Moles will dye before he lose his right (III. 251+)

Thou shalt know before th.is dais end - farewell (III. 216)

IIe beare this slaunder with a patient minds. / Specks them all fayre.
and ere the sunne go downs. / I' ls brine thee (III. 273)

But Lady. first ere you your iournsy take. / Vouchsafe at my reouest. one
graunt to make (III. 386)

Perhaps (I may>'moue his patience ere it be long(III. 199)

 

 

 

In one passage the preterite 'vere' refers to a potential action in

the past in agreement with another action also in the past.

In peace was the Temnle of the Lords buylt by Salomon. Christ would not
be borne. vntill there were peace through-out the whole worlds (II. 210)

c) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbiel clauses

eXprsssing purpose after such particles as 'that.' ’lest.’ etc.

5L

Come. let vs male on end. lost Cores come -.r find vs slacke in perform-
ing that which wee owe (III. 3023

But I lette that passe. least thou come in againe with thy fepburthen
(II. 53)

When lone tickleth thee decline it lost it etiffle thee. rather fast
then eurfotte (1. aka)

The dyall'e yours - watch tyne leste it be loste (I. 501)

Cast not your eyes on the heautie of woemen. leaste ye cast away your
heartee with folly (I. 28L)

Thou eaiet greene wounds are to be dressed roughly lee et they {ester
(11. 132)

d)i he subjunctive of potenticli ty occurs in adverbiel clauses

expressing limitetigg after such particles as ’unleee' or ‘except.'

For as the Stone Draconites can by no means he oolishod vnleeee the
lapidarie burns it. so the mind of Camilla can by no menace be cured
except Suriue ease it (11.183—L)

And yet vnleese Hip)omanee be lycked, it can-not worke. and exoeBt
Agocynon be sound it is nothing worth (II,115)

the penance shoe shall hauo is to make you.e ”oeegay which shoe shall
not denye thee vnleese shoe defie to (II. 137)

but I can-not requit it. vnleese either thou wort not Philautue. or I
not Camilla (11.125) 'W

But whether I lone or no. I cannot live in quiet. vnleeeo I be fit for
thy diat (II. 97)

I tell thee vnleeee thou be honest. I will flye (II. 3M5)

Bolike you cannot speake except you bee epightfull (III. 60-61)

Prayee and honourifieptune)t nothing leeee Sexcegt it be commendable to
be ooy'and honorable to he peevieh (II. M67)

the benefit of thich priueledge. I wil not '80 except_1ouggrannt it
(11. 103-h)

 

In one passage'were' occurs inetead of the present tense in an
unloes-cleuee after a 'wouldi plue infinitive statement.
I yeeld to death. but with such delight, that I would not wish to line.
vnleeeo itwere to hears thy eweete layee (III. 322)
e) The subjunctive of potentiality occur: in adverhial clauses

(saintimee in noun clauses) expressing indefinite action after such relative

particles as 'whet.' ‘vhetever.‘ 'Vheteoover.' 'ehere'(=3hereve£).

’55

‘ Q . § "
‘nherevcr.’ ' whcrssoever. ' 'then'{=wnenever).‘knenever.‘ twheneoever.’

I will sbnire this most accursed lend — / And vow'henceforth what fortune
ere beti de./ "ithin these woods and deserts to abide (III. 337)

Thy beauty will excuse bhfit ere thou sex. / And in thy lookes thy words
are priviledged (III. 250)

And as the softe wane receiueth whatsoever print be in the seals. and
sheweth no other impression. so the tender babe being sealed with his
fathers tittes representeth his Image most lynely (I. 207)

The one I cent to a noble man to nurse..who with great lone brought him
vp. for a years: so that where—sooner he wender.he hath his Nurses
name in his forhead (II. k)

happie Hiobe. that touched not the ground where the oz goo. but alwayes
holding thy beaks in the eyre (III. 310)

Ah: there so ere he be. safe may he be. (III.. 266)

This shalbe my resolution. where ever I wander to be as I were over
kneeling before Sepho (II. 315)

Courtinge me.kes the? stones to lure / ind guiftes reclaimes them to the
fist / m1 withy bridle and saddle sure / you well may ride then
where you list (III. hee)

But if they come not at all. or_ghen they come do vse themseluce honestly.
then come not out (III. 265)

plants and translate the crabbe tree. where._and whensoeuer it please you
and it will neuer beare sweets apple—(I. 191)

Elg.iny. stay. let him be baild. Hack.So he shall when I make him a bergen (III. 21%

These old huddles hone such strong purses with locks. when thgz shut
them they go off like a snaphnnco (III. 18%)

I doe agree thereto. and when thy state and my care be considered. thou
shalt knows thys question was not asked in vaine (II. 532)

 

f) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs inadverbial clauses express-

ing indefinite extent after phrases of comparison.

and in one words to set downs the onely triell that n Ladie roqnirsth
of hir loner. it is this. that he oerforme as much as he swaro(II. 168)

so is it not to be looked for. that i with all my cornice. suite.
desartes. and what els so—ener that may draw a woemanne. should winne
Camilla. as longs as Series. a percious stone in hir eyes. and an eye
acre in mine. Egg present (III. Ill-12)

Let not no bee a prey to this Earchaunt. who knovms no other god then
Gold. vnlesse it has falsely swearing by a god to get gold: let me.
as often as I be bought for money. or onwnd for meats. be turned into
a Bird. here. or (II I. 316)

In one passage the past tense occurs instead of the present tense

K“
F .

in encldverbial clause eXprsssing indefinite extent after a phrase of

comnarison.

there was one full hardie and full haples. whee most hungrie to do you
honor and desnerate of his sons good. though he knew himself so
cnchaunted by a cheunce. as he was neyther able to chardge staffe. nor
strike blows; yet. fayra mounted with his staffs on his thighs. did
thrust himselfe into the Justes. an6_§e long 93 horse hed anie
breath. and anie knight would encounter him. was content to bide the
brunt of the strongest Knight (I. 1451;)

 

g) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbiul clauses
exoressivg alternate contingency after 'whether.‘ In the second passage

the sequence of tenses requires the preterite.

'

But ehether I lone or no. I cannot live in quiet. vnlesse I be fit for
thy diet (II. 97)

hy father liked hir choyce. whether it were to flatter hir. or for fears
to offend hir (11. 72) ‘—

Eunhues having soiourned by the space of two moneths in Eanles. whether
he were noued by the courtesie of a young gentleman named Fhilautus.
or inforced by destinie (I. 196)

whether these be true or no. I wil not say (II. 32)

thether_you seen to weeps. or weeoe indeede / This handkercheff. will

W'stnnds you well in steeds (I. 502)

There is no harms done fhilautus. for whether you lens. or Euphues lost.
this shall breed no iarre (II. ES)

 

 

Lin statements of obligation

The subjunctive of obligation occurs in Lyly in detendent statements
a) in weakened commands. b) in statements of moral. logical. or necessary
inference or cornulsion. end c) in legal. or quasi-legal. injunctions.
In these instances. as commonly also in wishes in denendent statements.
the main verb is largely preparatory. the particulars of the obligation

being orpressed in the dependent clause.

a) Commands are eXpreesed by the formal subjunctive in dependent

clauses after such verbs as 'desire.‘ 'beseech.’ 'charge.’ ‘gray.'

'confvre,‘ 'take head.’ 'see,' etc.. or correapanding verbal nouns. In
the following passagcs the subjunctive verb carries the details of the
command. ”he command is of course not equally authoritative and may

take the form of a warning.

Sainct Paul sayth, I deoire you brethren that you;abatntn3 from the
comnanye of those that walks inordinatelye ( . 300)

Counsel you I will not to loue. but coniure you I must that you be not
diadainful (III. 310)

and I desire you as you owe mee any loue. that you suffer no to enioye
him (I. 2&5)

yea. but ¢-é take heeda my Thllnut s. thntythju thy selfe swallow not
a gudgen (I. 21“)

well. lat v3 to Gupta; and take heede that in your stubborneese you
offend him not. Whome by entrenties you ought to follow (III. 333)

Your Fnauaahiw brake your fast on the BishOps. by breaking your ieets
on them: but take heede_ygu bronke not your Dune necks (III. 398)

Phao,'? t will you hone re doe? fyli.?rke heede you do not as I did (11‘ 382)

Take heede Cupid thou hitte not Phno nith this shuftex for than shall
Venue parisha (II. ~11)

Take heads Canons, that >ld temwt not your lappe. and than you blush
for shame (II, 1106)

but let all 156159 heareofter take heede that they resist not loue.
thich vorketh wonders {IT}, 331)

Thorfore if thar be any thing that I may do you pleasure in. see it be
honest and 3&2 not tedious discourage or colours of rhetoric (lltflafi)
Gee this also be proclaimed , that whosoeuer will discover this practise.
shall have of Cynthia infinite thanks. and no small rewardes (III. 67)

Then Fidus when you match. god 59nd you such a one, as you like bent:
tut be sure ulvsiee. that your head he not higher then your'hat (II. 63)

 

 

It is admittedly difficult to distinguish clearly between subvunctivee
'of command and subjunctivee of wish id€Mpendent statements. Both involve
more or less the same preparatory verbs. In some instances the distinction
fie clear enough. St. Paul's injunction, quoted above. is clearly a command.
I Just as clearly 'rather doe I wish hee preserue our fame. then our lyvee'
(II. 318-19) is a wiah. The context is heluful. Perhaps the command in-
volve: more frequently,though not always. the direct address of the second

perenn. Such address carries the ainpiioation more of authority than of

wish, Certainly it nouli seen st1ngs to $3311e a command, even in the

subjunctive. to a third person impersonal object.

“he line betxeen the subjunctive of c1r mad and the imperative is
perhaps equally difficult to draw. “he intrntion in both is the same. and
the main verbs are again were or less the same. The following passages
no doubt involve the iuuerati ve: either the pronominal subject is entirely
omitt ed or the main verb ta.{es t‘.e orouo un.uith o‘jsctiva. The first
two are fairly definitely innerative. Perhags those likewise involving
'thee:‘ 'theo' is probably to be construed as the object of the main verb.
Som Aof the punctuation aft"? 'thse’ vould have clarified matters definitely.
The resource with ’you' are the most ambiguous. If 'you' is construed
as active 1ft r the main verb. tie 1a gee are identical in pattern
and function with trees involving 'thee.’ If however ‘you’ is construed
as nominative, subject of the detoldent verb. we have to interpret these

passages as subjtmctives of comm-3151.

I ray goe on, that I may glutte my salts in this science (II. 391)
I y'begin to h£.to ms. t not I may loue you (11.9?)
I charge thee follow her. but hurt her not (111,268)
I pray thee chews ve thy points (II. 1131)
-Let us see. but I pray thee Eroue eit better than t.hou didst thy self
to be valiant (II 386)
but I pray thee bring Vs to him cuickly (II,161)
therefore I pray thee tell what thou aylest (11.4%?)
I pray thee tell me the cause 7 (II. H11)
both diesemble. But pryt} y'Pan be packing (I. h7h)
Faith I have had but badde fortune. but I pris-thee tell me thine (II .L62)
Fay grammer. I pray you tell me who stole my spoons out of the buttrie?
(III. 20h )
I pray you sir tell me what you cannot doe (II, 1152)
No, I pray you eaue my labour (111.360)
But now. since I perceaue this harbour is too little for you. and you will
hayste sayle and be gone. I beseech you take this Anchor with you

(I. 1497)

57

b) The subgunctive of obligation a~‘errs in statements after
impersonal constructions implying moral or lovical necessity. The densndent

statement here specifies the details of the obligation.

It is most necessarie and most naturall in myns Opinion. that the mother
of the childe be also the nurse: (I. 26h)

For y° exerdiie'o? the bodye it is necessary also somewhat bee added
(I 26

Is it nZtJnecessery and requisite that the babe bee nursed vyth that true
accustomed iuyce & cherished with his wanted heat & not fed with
counterfeite diet? (I. 265)

It is also requisite that he has eXpert in mercisll affayres in shooting

(I. 277)

c) Ihe subjunctive of obligation appears in legal. or quasi-legal.
injunctions. Originally characteristic of legal language. the use was
extended.beyond to parallel functions in other instances. In such cases
the use is similar to the subjunctive after impersonal constructions

Just considered.

and in one words to set downs the onely triall that a lady requireth
of hir loner. it is this. that he performs as much as he snare (II. 16)
It behoueth, quoth ”hilsutus, that hgjninistreth to a Lady, 23.35 j£¢t'
desirous of hir health. as his owns credits (11.126)
th then let it follow, that the Drunchardg_nhich surfeith with wins
23 alwayes quaffing. because he liketh it. or the Enicure which
glutteth him-selfe with meats be euer eating (II. 1725
Then kneeling aften thus I do speaks to her image. I Onlye Iewell. all
onlye Iewell. whichs onlye deserveste I That means heartes be thy
seat and endless fame be y servants (III. hhS-Q)

 

L In statements of condition

There are inumerable difficulties in the analysis and classification
of verbs in conditional statements. ”he prevailing custom among gremmarians
is to speak of conditions contrary to fact (whichtaqnire the subjunctive).
but they treat very sketchily. or not at all. the implied category of

conditions not contrary to fact.

arc-neriens as e'grcup mention only two typical instances. '1!
I were you’ and 'if he were right.’ as definitely contrary to fact. These
instances are listed by Jespersen. Sweet. Onions. Iernnld. Fowler. and
Pontena.» But Scnnenschein says that these instances do not imply unreality
but nerely simple supposition.3u)aocording to Kellner the use of 'vere'
in these cases is a substitution for on earlier 'be.' 35)Onions lists
'hnd' in a contrary to fact usage.36)but Jespersen holds that 'hod.'
'did:' eto.. shore the verb for: is identical for the indicative and the
subJunctive. are indicative.37 guest is rather sketchy but he supports

Jespersen's notion regarding identical forms.38 )

Discussion earths implied category of conditions not contrary to
foot is longer. Onions in his discussion cfi'conditional statements
succeeds nore or less in avoiding the-.39 goutsne in a forty page discussion
offers little or no enlightenment.ho )But Knsten reports that the imperfect
subjunctive merely implies uncertainty and in inverted position of words
may serve to express a condition based on subjective possibility.h1 )
Snort is the only grammarian. so far no I know. to speak of conditions
contrary to fact and conditions not contrary to fact. He states in one

a.

‘7
footnote (p. 69) that where the condition may oranot be true one can

use the indicative nood; later again in s note(p. 200) he states that

 

3“ .A.Sonnensflhein. The Soul of Grammar. p. 9h.

:2 can Kellner. Historical Outlines of Fa gm: %tex. pp. 2314-35..
.T.Ontons. An Advanced English Syntax. pp. 57 2.

g; tto Jespereen. Essentials of English Grammar. p. 255.
enry Sweet. A.New English Grammar. Part II. pp. 110-15.

3’ .‘1‘.0nione. An Advanced English Syntax. pp. 57-62.

“1 . Poutena. Mood and Tense of the Envlish Verb. pp. Nh-BZ.

'illian Iasten. An Inspiry into the‘flse of the SubjunctiveI p. 9.

 

It.)

in conditions not contrary to fact one can use the verb form and tense
required.by the thought.h2)The position assumed throughout this study of
Lyly. that all conditions. whether contrary to fact or not. are sub-

Junctive. since they are equally assumptions whether expressed in indicative

or subjunctive forms. is at variance even with Smart's notions.

But it is questionable whether at the present time. or in the time
of Lyly. a hard and fast line can be drawn between the two types of
conditions. Conditional statements usually listed as contrary to fact
are of several kinds. There are those that state an obviously impossible
condition followed by a conclusion which in point of time is still possible;
as. ‘If I were you.Iid see him at °9§'. There are others that . using a
somewhat similar form and pattern. state a condition possible of fulfill-
ment in the future followed by a conclusion also possible; as ‘If I were
going to EurOpe next summerz::;d make my arrangements six months in
advance.’ There is some doubt as to whether this is a condition
contrary to fact. Then there are those that state a condition obviously
impossible because the time for its fulfillment has passed followed by
a conclusion equally impossible for the same reason; as. 'If he had come
by twelve o'clock we could have been under way by two.‘ And what about
conditions not contrary to facts! It is difficult too not to be misled
by indicative forms of the verb and not to assume indicative intentions
for indicative forms. Particularly is this difficulty acute where in-

dicative and subjunctive forms have been historically leveled. It is

 

h2".K.Sna.rt.§§glish Review Grammar. pp. 67-77. 200.

likewise difficult to speak categorically of time distinctions in the case
of conditional statements. It is difficult too to determine in any

given instance whether a specific tense form is due to the principle

of tense sequence or to subjunctive intention s. Finally it is difficult
always to be sure of the intentions of the writer. Throughout such a

study any judgment in analysis is as likely to be subjective as objective.

The materials from Lyly I have arranged according to a) conditional
statements in the present tense form with present or future implications
and b) conditional statements in the past tense ferns with various
implications. Under each of these categories I shall also consider
1) efiiptical eXpressions. 2) the auxiliaries 'to be.‘ 'to have.’ ' to do.‘
and 3) substitutions of indicative for subjunctive forms. The reason
for condidering the auxiliaries ‘to be.’ 'to have."to do' here. rather
than with the medals in the following chapter. is that they are at
times used as full verbs. and even when they are used as auxiliary verbs
they maintain distinct subjunctive forms for the second and third person
singular present and. in the case of ‘to be.‘ for the singular preterite;
I am proceeding on the assumption that every conditional statement is

subjunctive in intention.

a) Conditional statements in the present tense. I shall begin by
listing instances involving the third person singular. Some of these
refer to present time in the condition. others to future time. still
others to generic or universal time. but the lines of demarkation aiftoo
vague. and the overlappings too frequent. to permit hard and fast class-

ification. Itshould be pointed out that many of these citations (almost

53

all from Vol. III and about half from Vol. II) are from the dialogue of
the plays and represent therefore good current colloquial. not nerely

literary. usage.

Let vs all gee. for I must to my clothes that hang on the tenters:
(aside.> my boy shall hang with them. if hes aunswers nee not his

dayes works (III. 19h)

Pardon use good hadame. for if Endinion awake. hee shall: my selfe haue
sworne neuer to reueale it'(III. in)

My father cannot be miserable. if Protes be happiez for by selling as
euerie day. hee shall neuer want meats. nor I shiftes to escape (111.321)

If’your tooth_bg_hollow it must be stout. or puld cut (III. 135)

for being turned to a tree for reuealing a truth. I will recouer thee
againe._if in El newer be the effect of truth (III. 79)

truther.'if_the ccurtesie of Englands be annswerable to the customs of
Pilgrimes. then will the nature of the Countrey. excuse the boldnesse
of straungers (II. 36)

thy griefe not so great but I can ease it. If it be ripe it shalbe
lawnced (I. 212)

If Curio bee the person. I would neither wishe thee a greater plague.’
nor him a deadlyer poyson (I. 2RD)

If she be obstinate. why should not I be desperate? (II. 108)

Foolish wench. what should the boy doe heere. if he bring not remedies
with him? (III. 399)

If to cats store of salt cause one to frette. and to haue no salts signifie
lacks of wit. then do you cause me to neruaile (II. 69-76)

If me she chuse. thou must be well content (III. 376)

If he some short of their religion. why he is but a colds Protestant
(Ills 396“97)

but I pray thee goe at your best lsyours. for Cynthia beginneth to rise.-
snd if she discouer our loue we both perish (III. 5h)

If he espie or but suspect. thou.must needes twice perish. with his

t_hate. and thine owns loue (II. 352)

And I doubt not but if Fhilautue fall into his olde veins in Englan .
you shall hears of his new device in Italy (11. 1%)

If Alexander haue any thing that may pleasure Diogenes. let me know. and
take it (II. 332)

If one haue either the giftes of Fortune. as greats riches. or of nature.
as segnely personage. hee is to bee dispised in respect of learning
I. 2 9) f

If the king:lose his golden wish. was shall haue but a brasen Count (111.132)

I haue forsaken all other fortunes to follows Cynthia. and beers I stands
ready to die if it please Cynthia (III. 76)

.1: Lucille reads this trifle. she will straight proclaims Ebphues for a
traytor (I. 256)

If she seems at the first cruell. be not discouraged (II. 390)

(1?:36 tough his roabes they are turned to gold. and what is not that
touchethfihin. but becommeth golds? (III. lBh-BS)

6k

If nature works the effects. that booteth any education? (I . 192)
Friend Fidus (if Fortune allow a tearm so familiar) I would I might line
to see thee as wise. as I percieue thee wittie (11.50)
if one ”533 with them boldly. then is he impudent (1.195)
if thrt be his hepe. he may as wel dive to the bottoms of the sea (111.1h6)
Ile warrant if this bee the creams. the milks is verie flat (III. 203)
If neuer to doo harme._be to doo good. I dare saie I am not ill (III. 202)
If he be cleanly. then terms they him proude (I. 25h)
If loue be a God. why should not loners be vertuoust (II. hLfi)
If the winds be with me. I can angle. or tell tales (II. 37h)
If Eature bears no sway. why vse you this adulation? (I. 192)
If Thilautus come this tinter. he shall in this my pilgrimage be a partner.
unleasant companion is a bayte in a iourney (I. 323)
and if thy libertie consist in 13. Ideas from nee. thou shalt haue it (111.615)
and if shg)dgny that name. we will enioyne hir a penance for hir pride
(II. 13
If their Prince dye. they know not how to line (11.115)
If Ioue espis Sapho. he wil devise some new shape to entertains her (II. 37”)
i£:all fall out unless. the worst is beating (III. 215)
This green nosegaie I fears my'boy hath smelt to. for it'he get but a
penny in his nurse. he turnes it sodainly into Argentum notabils ( 111.168)
I have hearde often-tymee that in Laue there are three thinges for to be
veed. if time serue . violence. if wealth be great. gold. if necessitie
compel.sorcerie (II. 113)
And if an vr to vtter what I whisper. then will I name it honor
(III. 7%)
If hee bee base thy blonds wyll make hym noble (I. 230)
But if there be anyone that deeneth wit not necessary to the obtayninge
of wisedome. after hee hath gotten the ways to vertue by industrys
and exercise. hee is an heriticke (I. 253)
It is an olde Frouerbe that if one dwell the nexte dore to a creple
he wil learns to hault (I. 267)
Ah Euphues little dost thou know that if thy wealth last. thy wit will
give but small warmth & if th wit sncline to wilfulnes. that thy wealth
will doe thee no great good (I. 195)
If I shall says vnto the sinner thou.shalt dye the death. yet if hes
repent and doe Iustice he shall not dye (I. 302)
If laws scene loathsome vnto thee. searche the secretes of phisicke (1.251)
If in euery part it seems not alyke. you know that it is not for him that
fashioneth the shoe. to make the-grains of the leather (II. 12)
And if you will but accept a willing minds in steeds of a costly repast.
I shall thinks my selfe beholding vnto you: and if time serue. or my
Bees prosper. I wil make you part of amdnds. w a better breakfast (11 .h7)
For this sayth Hcli to his sonnes. if man sin againe man. God can
forgiue it. if against God who shall entreat for him! (1.300)
.If_one writs neuer so well. he cannot please all. and write he neuer so
All has shall nlease some (1. 182-83)

 

 

 

 

 

1 list next the instances involving the second person singular.

65

ho. no, Euphues. thou.mnkest Lone nothing but a continual wooing. i£;5h2§
barre it of the effect. and then is it infinite. or if thou allow it.
and yet forbid it. a perpetuall warfare. and then is it intollerable
(11 155* ~59)

if thou asks whose sonne I am also. I asks thee wwose sonns I am not (I.186)

But if thou attegpt againe to wring water out of the Pommics. thou shalt
but bewraye thy falsehoods. and augment thy shame. and my severitie (II. 139)

s e barketh not if Ornheus pins sweetly. assure thy self that‘i£_£§gg
be penitent. he will bee pleased‘(II. 1M2)

Die Phao. Phao die x for there is no hope if thou bee wise; nor safetie.
if thou be fortunate (IL 358)

How now. Candies . if thou.begin to slip at beautio on a sodaine. thou.w!lt
surfet with carousing it at the last (III. 159)

If thou.c1ayme gentry by petegres. practise gentlenesss by thine honestie
(I. 31?)

I yeslds. sayd the winds . for if thou.continus shining. he will also put
off his cote (III. 80)

If thou count to trauails straunge countries. search the naps (II. 26)

why foclgi that is al one; for if thou cry.thou must needes make a noise
(II 3 )

If thou denis the truth who can prone it. if thou Genie that blacks is
bhacke. who can by reason reproue thee (I. 29L)

If th on desire to be olde. beware of too much vdne (II. 17)

I am (not)>a goddesse. but a Ladle and a Virgins. whose loue if thou
embracel thou shalt line no lesse happie then the ode in he men (111.322)

139thcu encroach upon our courtly tearnes. weels tro cs thee (III. 155)

If thou feels in thy selfe Athsos anye sparks of grass prays vnto the
lords and hes wyll cause it to flame. if t:ou.haus no feelings of fayth.
yet prays and the Lords wyll glue aboundsnnce (I. 295)

and if thou.haus any duetie of a childe. or care of a friends. -- then
rslsafiz thy Father of gryefs. and acquite thy selfe of vngratefulnssss
(I. 2 )

Therefore ngilla if thou haueany care to bee a comforts to mye hoerye

‘ haires or a commoditye to thy common seals. frame thy selfe to that
honourable estate of matrimonye (I. 230)

But this take for a warning. if euer thou.iarre.when thou dhouldest iest.
or follow thine owns will. when thou art to hears my counsayls. then
will I depart from thee (II. 152)

Entertaine such men.as shall be trustis. for if thou keene a Wolfe within
thy decree to doe mischiefe. or a Foxe to works craft and subtiltis.
thou shalt finds it as perrilous. as if in thy barnes thou shouldsst
neinteyns Eyes. or in thy groundes holes (II. 226)

If thou make a question where there is no doubt. thou.nuet take an aunswers
where there is no reason (II. 177)

and if than make of thy selfe aboue reason they laugh at it (II. 119)

There bee manye neates which are sowre in the south and sharps in the
ma¥¥o. but if thou.ming1s them wyth sweets sauces. they yeelde both a
pleasuant taste and holssome nourishment (I. 313)

bee not curious to enquire of God. but careful to belseus. neither bee
thou desperate if thou see thy einnes abounds. but faythfull to obtains
mercy (I. 296)

 

 

 

 

.66

Flye that che which is peculiar to 31 those of thy countrey, Ielousie:
for if thou suspect without cause. it is the next way to haue cause
(II. 226)

yet if thou '30 few words and fayre speeches. thou ehalt commeund any
thing thou standout in need of (II. 31)

The verbs in these conditions are unmistakably subjunctivn in forn._
In both the second and third-persons singular the subJ native form was
peruler with Iyly.- In fact of all the citations I collected of the present
the third personal singular anpears in almost half; the citations with the
second and third persona singular together outnumber the others almost two
to one. Vhe second person singular has since Iyly'e time all but disappeared
from ordinary use. The third person preeent singular subjunctive lasted
well into thn nineteenth century and was then replaced by the indicative
form. surviving only areheicé? (in legal language, g;g;.'if the court
please,’ etc.). Ehe matter of the substitution of the indicative for the

ahjunctive form will be diecuesed later.

I finally liet instances involving the first pereOnel singular and the

first. second. and third persons plural.

If I heeamiable, I will doe those things that are fit for so good a face
' Zn. 5)
I will to the riuer. where if I be rid of this intollerahle disease of
gold. I will next shake off that vntemperat desire of gouernment (111.131)
For now I a.m brought into such a doubt & doubt-full distress that I know.
not hove to tourne nee. if I beleeve not the Scriptural. then shall I
be damned for vnbeliefe (I. 300)
If I bring the one to passe he shall forgoe his olde course (I. 322)
Ile make thee crie SIf’I catch thee in the forest thou shalt be leasht (III.lu7)
If I come not about you neuer trust mee (111,177)
You must pardon me 11' I denie to tell it (111,1:7)
Algkeuer I fall to mine old Eyes. I must put thee in the fault that talks.
of it (II. 33-3h)
whether therefore ehal I goo. or how may I anoide the day of vengeance
to come? if I goo to heauen that is his seate (I. 301)

 

In deeds quoth Philautus. if euer I kill my selfe for lone. it shall he
with a.sigh. not with a swords (II. 185)

If I lone one that is fayre. it will kindle gelousic (I. 2h8)

If I make my choyse I shall speeds so well as he that enioyeth all
Eurone (II. 135

But happely thou wilt say if I refuse their courtesie I final he accompted
a Mececke. a KilkeSOppe. taunted and retaunted (I. 2L9)

Pardon me gentlewomen i; I vnfold every oyle & shew euery wrinckle of
womens disposition (I. 30?)

If I winne my loue. you shall not loose your labour (II. 113)

I? you prephane the Scriptures. it is a pretie wit: if we but allcdgp
Doctors to exoound them. we are wicked (III. EOE)

If we confesse our offences hee is fnythfull and iuete so that he will
forgiue vs our sinnes (I. 392

If wee doo it not use are vudone! (III. 198)

so: thou.to abate the pride of oureffections. dost detract from thy porn
factions. thinking it sufficient.‘i£ once in a month we enioz a glynsc
of thy @aiestie, and then. to encrease our greefes. thou doost decrease
thy glemes (111.22-23)

let vs be punished with more than unconstancie if we f 10 eyther to
lcue Constancie. or to cternize your memorie (I. 559)

If we flye theeues that steals our goods. shall wee follows uurtherers
y cut our throatesT(II. 170)

Both not Cicero conclude and allowe. that if wee follows and obeyHaturc.
we shell neuer crre? (I. 192)

Where is nothing more swifter than time. nothings more sweeter: ---
Our lyfe is long if we know how to vse it (I. 28k-85)

If wee present a mingle-mangle. our fault is to be excused. because the

w_nhole worlds is become an Hodge-podge (III . 115)

If see eoeedg him not shortly. I will burns my cappe (III. 71)

:£_you accuse use of vnneturalnesse in that I yelde not to your request.

FwI am also to condemns you of vnkindenesse. in that you graunt not my
petition (I. 2M5)

Heere shall yes finds hOpO 1: ye be in disneire. comfort if_ye he distressed.
if ye thirst_g;incke. meats if ye hunger (I. 290)

If ye feere ‘osésnfigzficayth. without you fulfill the law you shall perish:

Fflheholde Christ ~hich sayth. I haue overcommen the laws (I. 290)

If you he wronge (which cannot be done with-out wrong) it were better
to cut the shoes. then burns the last (II. 10)

Farewel Ladies. whose lines are subiect to many mischieues; for if you he
faire. it is hard to be chest (III. 305)

Endiuion. you must change your pillows; and if you be not weeric of
sleepe. I will carrie you vhere at ease you shall sleepc your fill (III.59)

GEntleman. if you be lease. you.ere too boldc. if so. too broade. in
clayuing a customs. where there is no prescription (II. 10h)

If_yee beleeve not yea shell not endure (I. 295)

égrycu come to learns. you could not come soone enough; if to laugh. you
become to soone (II. 35k)

iffiyou desyre to he kept lyke the Roses when they haue loste theyr coulour
smell sweets as the Bose doth in the bud (I. 203)

As for the daintics that you talks of. if you.haue any such. you shall do

 

 

 

68

well to send them (I. L93)

If you bone a fiommieelon to take Yo Ladyes. latte me see it (II. 57)

I? you keeps promise to marrie them by your deuice. end their parents
consent. you shall haue tonne pounds a peace for your paines (III. 198)

i£_you longs for comfort in your hoary haires. be not coye when you.haue
your golden lockes (I. 203)

Ifgyou mug; vs. weele pepper you (III. 228)

let me haue my lone answered. and you shall finds no faithfull; in which-i;
you make delaies. I cannot be patient (I. h88)

Erinfi forth the virgine. the fatall virgin. the fairest virgins. if you
means to unpeuse Heptuns. andpreserue your Countrey (II. he“)

the eubtill Fore any well be beaten. but neuer broken from stealing his
pray. if you oownio snices they smell the sweeter (I. 191)

And so #33 rest in Good case if you rest well content (II. 359)

Ihese spots tentlemen are to be uorne out. if you rubbe then over with
this Lunarie (III. 62)

If“you thinks well of your witte. he alwayee pleasaunt (II. 119)

If you thing it against nature to sacrifice your children. thinks it also
against sauce to destroy your Countrey (II. M56)

0 sir. if_you wil.I will sing to them. your mouth booing the instrument
(III. 13h)

But as for the new histresse of lone. - or Lady. -—- your softe hayre will
twine to harde bristles. your tongue to a stings. and those alluring
eyes to vnluckynes. in which if the Gods eyde me not. I will curse the
finds (11. L13)

Lutumne shauee like a razor: - if these leeks be rooted against winds and
weather. spring and fall. I swears they shal not be lopoed. till Motto
by my kneuerie be so bauld that I may write verses on ht: scalpe (111.153)

If they be true lone knote.'hie Vnposeible to vnknit them; if false. I
neuer tied them (II. h58)

only Souldiera. if they be old. must beg in their owns countries; if
yang. trio the—Iortune of warres in another (III. 125)

I will rouse him vu. and if his euros to not Asses eares. I will make
them tingle (III. 1L9) ‘

Raffe. I will hears no more signes. if they be all such signes (II. R52)

Dumbo men are eloquent. if they be liberell (II. 391)

how if our witsAhe not in waine. our knauery shall bee at the full (111.215)

Yes. and net withall. if your fortunes be answerable to nine. for I find
my histrie innoueablg: and the hOpe I huue is to despaire (III. 31L)

3; they chance to port in this case. God send them merry meeting (111.353)

Yea father. if tha§_my tenres clears not this fountains. then may you
swears it is but a neere mockerie (III. kg)

.Egt if they come not at all. or when they some do vse themselues honestly.
then cone not out. least you seeming Iealous make her ouer hate you
(III. 265)

hy’eimples are in operation as my simplicitie is. which if they do litle
good. assuredly they can doe no harms (II. £00)

Fair faces heue no fruites. if they haue no witnesses (II. 382)

kf’thez lyko writings they read them often (II. 122)

Manic there be that wish to lym. yet watt not how to die: lett me be

theire example If they like not lyfe (I. h66-61)

 

 

 

 

 

.69

Ah C‘elia.‘$z_§$gggg_lflll they lane and yet dieeemble. who dare say that
they dieeemble. and not lune Y (III. 12*)

if they scratch; wee will bring cattee (III. 1:06)

Hyde: of Phrygia hath eeeee career So he hath. vnhappie Hydee. If theee
reedee sing my ehame eo lowde, wil nen whisper it eoftly? (111.. 1

Winston will be ouertaken i; theLtargy (111.192)

Lam and change are at variance. therefore if they varie. they nuet

ehahge (III. 123) '
where if they wax wealthy; they shall be enuied. not loued (II. 26)

It ie obvioue that these laet citatione are in thought and intention
exactly parallel to thoee involving the eecond and third pereone eingular.
They'are therefore clearly subjunctive. It ie true that the ve~b form ie
not dietinctly subjunctive. and where Judged entirely on the baeie of the
verb torn they here been frequently analyzed as indicative. By phonetic
development-theee forms can represent the earlier on indicative or eub-
Junctive. the OE present subjunctive had an inflecti onel «e in the eingular
and wee thus already identical in form with the firet pereon einguler
indicative. In the plural the 01 eubJunctive had an inflectionel -en.
Hhege in M3 the older indicative plural ending in -ep was replaced by
-e(n). the indicative and eubJunctive plural forne also became identical.
It ie obviously incorrect therefore to claee then as indicativee categorically
when they oould.be either subjunctive or indicative. Here it is clearly
the eubJunetive notion. not the verb fan, that furnishee the clue for

claeeification.

Verb form as the prime factor in determining mood createe quite a
clear cut ieeue. 0n the 'form' eide. to mention a few. can be listed
each gremmariane ae Sweet. Jaspereen. Poutema. Kaeten. Fowler. Kruieinga.
and Perrin. On the notional eide are Sonnenechein, Curme, Onions. Ramsey.
Smart. and Bevier. Poutema reetridte the subjunctive to verb form and ite

exietence to only a few foesilized expressione; but he observes I'the context

or the general inport of a sentence will bring out the subjunctive notion
without special verb-forms.“ h3)1s not this last statement inconsistent
with hie earlier restriction of the subjunctive to verb form! Kasten
acknowledges as real subjunctives only the forms ’thou and he be' and

'I and he were.‘ 1419 He further remarks that the subJunctive nood does not
serve to express condition. but that it indicates merely a statement
reifected on.u5} Perrin considers as subJunctive only the sigéle formal
subjunctive.h623ut Bevier deniee that verb for: alone determines mood and

treats as subjunctive any verb ihose mood is denoted by any word that

“D

impliee uncertainty. condition. or supposition.

Frequently conditional statements such as these appear in Lyly in
elliptical for:. But they do not yield any special points other than those
already discussed or to be discussed in the next two sections. and I shall

content myself with a few citations by way of illustration.

If lobe too young to vnderstand your destinies. it is a signe I can-not
like. if too obetinate.it is a token I will not: therefore for you to
bee dilplenled. it eyther needeth not. or booteth not (II. 106)

If’he be cleanly. then terms they bin proude. if means in apparel. a
sloven (I. 25%) '

If a field.nay be pitcht. we are readies if they scratch. wee will
bring cattes: if eoolde. we will bring women (III. ho6)

If hee bee base thy blonde wyll make him noble. if beggerlzg thy goodes
ehall lake hyn wealthy (I. 230)

Where if they wax wealthy. they shall be enuied. not loued: If poor
punished. not pittied (II. 26)

Onely my eute is to you Gentlemen. that if anye thing bee anisee. you
pardon it: if well. you defende it: and how-sooner it bee. you accepte it(II.12)

-—‘__

h H. Poutsma..L Grammar of Late Modern English. Part II. p. 165.
1&- William Kaeten. An {Rania into the 1ise of the SubJunctive. p. 3.
53 Ib , 6-
h6 id. pp. 1 17.
“has. Perrin. engines: to nigneh. pp. 533.91)
)T.J.Bevier. "American Use of the SubJunctive.* American $fieech. Vol. VI.
pp- 207'15.

 

The verbs"to be.‘ 'to have.’ and 'to do' can be used as full verbs
or as auxiliary verbs. As full verbs they have been included in the fore-
going discussion. As an auxiliary 'be' is used to form 1) the perfect
tense (with verbs of notion only) and 2) the present passive voice:

’have' is used to ford?) the perfect tense and 2) the perfect passive
voice; 'do' is used to emphasise or intensify another verb. I here give
examples of their use by Lyly as auxiliaries in conditional statements

with present or future implications.

'to be‘

If all bee ggneJle not static (III. 191;)

I marvell I hears no newes of Dronio: -- Ile hunt him out. if the
lgitersacke be gone springing into a tauerne; Ile fetch hin reeling
out (III. 188)

Not yet come to my self or if i beg. I dare not credit nineweares (111.322)

you bane caught a Frog. if I be not deceiugd. and therfore as good it were
not to hurt him. as not to eats him (11. 173)

God sane you fairs Ladies all: and for my part. if euer I be brought to
answere my sinnes. God forgiue mi my charting. and lay Vsurie to my
charge (I. 1#99)

If then be witched with eyes. wears the eie of a wosill in a ring. which
is an enchauntment against such charmes (II. 52)

How it resteth. Dipsos. that if thou wilt forsweare that vile art of
Enchaunting. Geron hath promised again to receius thee: otherwise. i;
thou_be wedded to that wickedness. I must and will see it punished to
the tttermost(III. 78)

Neptune cannot be ouer-reached.by Swaines. himselfe is subtile; and'ig
Diana be ouertaken by craft. Cupid is wise(II. hhl)

Ifiyour;position be granntedl that where beautie is. there is also vertue.
then myght you adds that where a fayre flower is. there is also a
sweets sanour (II. 166)

If my lewde lyfe Gentlemen.lcue giuen you offence. lette my good counsayle
make amendes. i£;§y_gy folly any be allured to lust. let then by my
repentaunce be drawne to continencie (1. 2h?)

If witte be employed in the honest study of learning what thing so pretious
as wittet (I. 2&1)

And if eueryggentleman be made of the mettall that Philantus is. then I
ieare I shall be challenged of as many as I haue vsed to company with

I. 229) ~

Dost thou.not know that the weeks stomacke if it be cloyed with one dyet

doth soone surfet? (I. 236)

72

If you be fouls. you.shall seldome be flattered; if_you be not flattered.
you will euer be sorrowfull (III. 305-6) —’

If you be examined how we met. swears by chance (III. 192)

If the tree be blasted that blossomes. the faults is in the rind. and not
in the roots; and if ourgpaetimes be misliked. that haue bin allowed.
you must inputs it to the malice of others. and not our endeuour (11.359)

and to thee Philautus I begin to addresse my speech. hauing made an end
of mine hermits take. and if these few_precepts I giue thee be obserued.
then doubt not but we both shall learns that we best lyke (II. 30)

'te hale'

I shoulde haue halfe a dozen starres in my pocket if I haue not LQII
them. but heere they be (11. M63)

if here 1 haue vsed bad tearmes. it is because they are not to bee answered
with good tearnes (III. 396)

Why then thou.art rich if thou.haue learned this cunning (II. #63)

if thou haue revealed the troth. he must needes thincke thee vnconstant
(I. 206)

Martin. if thou to causes have crept into the bosome of some great men.
saying thou hast the churches discipline. ' ... it may bee. thou shalt
bee hearkened too. stroakt on the head. greasd in the hand. fed daintelie.
kept secretlie. and countenaunst mightelie (III. MOE)

If experience have not taughte you this. you haue lyved long & learned
lyttle (I. 193)

Rise therfore Bushues. & take hart at grease. younger yn shalt neuer
be plucke vp thy stomachs. if loue it £3l!’ haue stougg thee it shal
not stiffle thee(1. 212)

If thongshe hens giuen hir fayth..darest thou.call hir honour into suspition
of falahood? (II. 87)

If thy lucke haue beene infortunate. it is a signe thy lining hath not
beene Godly (II. 1H9)

If she haue dealte hardely with me. why extoll you so muche my birth?(I.l92)

Seeing therefore it is labour lost for mes to perswade you.-- f you
haue taken lyttle pleasure in my reply. sure I an that by your
counsaile I haue reaped lease profit (1. 19%)

If therefore the Gods haue endowed hir with as much bountie as beautie.-~-
certes she will neyther conceiue sinisterly of my sodayne sute (1.209)

Doubtlesse if euer she hir selfe haue ben scorched with the flames of
desire. she will be ready to quench the coales with courtesie in an
other (I. 213) t

if euer she haue hen attacked of lens. she will rescue him y is drenched
in desire (I. 213)

if euer she haue ben taken wt the feauer of fancie. she wil help his

 

 

aeue TI. 213)
Their trials & recoueries are either by verdect. or demur. confession or
default. wherin if EEY fault haue been committed. either in processe or

 

forms. matter or iudgement. the partie greeued may hens a write of errour
(II. 195)

\—

“‘0 do.

And because I wil not feeds you.vith delayes. nor that you.should
confort your selfe with tryall. take this for a flatte aunswere..that
as yet I means not to loue any. and if I doe . it is not you. & so
I leans you (II. 65)

O fortunate England that hath such a Queene. vngratefull if thou preye
not for hir. ricked‘i£_thou do not lone hir. miserable. if thou loose
hir (II. 205)

Ah fond Euphues my doors friend. but a simple foole if thou.belesue now
thy oogling Cards. and an obstinate fools if thou do not recent it
(11. 8 )

keeps secrete closely in thy minds / Ihings that thy state and credits
binds; / Beware. if thou doo then disclose./ To when and where. for
feare of fees (III. 5

if ttfrefore thou doe but harken to the Syrens. thou.wilte bee enanoured

Howe fonds art thou. if thou.doo not beleeue it? (III. 52)

Grannt gentle God. grannt this our small request. and 1f abilitie in VI
do rest (III. 383)

Ocasioo cannot want. if wil doe not (II. 338)

If therefore nan rather then he woulde bane no Godo doe worship 3 stone.
how much more art thou.duller then a stone which goest against the
Opinion of all men (I. 293)

O beware of a gray beard. and 3 holds head: for if such a one doo but nod.
it is right dudgin and deeps discretion (III. 303)

239. If Nature tilde than do attend on no. / But little service hone I to
commannd (III. 2B6)

On our browse if heroes doe growe./has not Bacchus armed cool (I. h97)

Sleeps woulde doe thee more good then speech: the Hoone heareth thee
not. or if shoe doe.regardeth thee not (III. 23)

But learns fhilfiutus to line hereafter as though thou shouldest not line
at all. -- the st friends is worse then a fee. if a nan doe not vse
him (II. 1H9)

 

Occasionally Lyly substitutes indicate forms for subjunctive for-s

in such conditions. Such substitutions are possible only in such categories
as have distinct indicative and subjunctive forms: that is. in the second
and third.persons singular and in the case of 'to be.’ whether as a full
verb or auxiliary. in the first person singular and throughout the plural.

I have no example from Lyly of the substitution in the first person singular
and only one in the plural. Even in the second and third persons singular
the substituted fern is. to Judge from the numerical count’very much less

frequent than the subjunctive fore.

and ifyyet thou art to learns thy spell. Learns other things. snob
dogtrine is for hell (III. hen)

And hoere by the way it shall not be amisse. aswell to drius away the
sedionmnesse of time, as to delight our selues with taltke-- which
if thou Philantns‘agt disnosed to hears. and these present attentiue
to bans. I will snende some time about it (II. 1h)

But if thou.oeasest not thy bald iests still to spread. Ile neuer leans.
till I haue rimde thee dead (III. h22)

So going my way. I said. thou shalt repent it. if thou o
‘te Alexander (II. 323)

Twit not me with my ancestors. nor my wines honeetie: if thou.doest
(III. 178)

If‘he hath ought offended thee./Torgiue. as thou.the like wouldest be:/'
21nd think? if thou hast gone awrie./Thon for forgivenesse must applfi/

111. 55

Thine opinions are so monstrous that I cannot tell whether than wylte
cast a don t also whether thon.haue a soulde or no. -- for if thou.hast
as yet fel no tast of the spirit working in thee. then sure I an that
to prone the immortallitie of the souls were bootelesss (I. 300)

If thou.haste belyed women. he will iudge thee vnkynde (I. 206)

Yea. but if a man hath nothing els to cats. what shall it diegeett (II. 39“)

If he hath ought offended thee. Forgius. as thou.the like wouldest be
(III. 1:55)

I; fortunewgives you.nothing she doth well (I. 503)

Oreates. if thou standst vpon thins oath. Let me alfne. to answers for
vs both (III. 337)

Hans not iniuries beene sweet to nee. if thou.voudhsafedst I should
bears than? (III. 31)

The patient. if Phisitions are to be credited. & common orperienoe estened.
is y. nearest death when he thinketh himselfe nast his disease (I. 309)

afiest not to

It should be added that the subjunctive notions in these conditional
statements can be.and frequantly are in Lyly. eXpressed.by means of the

model auxiliaries 'nry.’ ‘shall.' 'will.‘ ’should.' or 'would.’

b) Conditional statements in the past tense. Conditional statements
involving past tense forms are more difficult of analysis than those
hrolving-present tense forms. Some of the difficulties have already been
pointed out in the Opening paragraph on conditional statements.’ I might
say. to start with. that conditional statenents with preterite forms are
very much less frequent in Iyly than conditional statements with present

forms. And in the analysis it must be remembered that the indicative and

Vldtllm: . l a

sthunctive preterites in the ease of all verbs. with the exception of
'to be‘ in the singular. have become identical either by phonetic develcp-

menteor hy analogical displacement of the subjunctive form by the indicative.

I shall try to distinguish 1) conditions in the past tense referring
to action or status in the past (not contrary to fact): 2) conditions
referring to action or status in the future; 3) conditions referring to
generic action or status; h) conditions referring to action or status in
the present sc-celled conditions contrary to fact (with special attention
to 'uere'); and 5) conditions referring to action or status in the past

(contrary to fact).

I) Conditions referring to action or status in the pest (not contrary

to fact). He nodal substitute is here possible.

If the sight of such vglye shapes caused a loathinge of the like sinnes.

I then my good Euphues consider their plight. and beware of thyne own
perill (I. 188)

if they come not. they ver sent for. & so vsed as they had hen countryutas
not straungsrs (II. 8%)

Gertes 3; when I looked merilye on Philautus. hes deemed it in the ways
of marriage. or if seeinge nee disposed to ieste. he tooks ace in good
earnest. then sure hee night gather some presumption of my lens. but
no promise (I. 225)

if one ue)hin water. why'he would lie downs & bath hinselfe like a.hanke

III. 21

For if I sane no cause. why diddest thou.picke a quarrell: if any. uhy
shouldeat thou crane a pardon? (II. 1&5)

Alas what should I say? if Petrarch knew not in uhat Sphere of Planets
to lodge is Laura. how shold I guesse in.uhat order of Angels I
should pig} our Elizaheth? (I. 512)

If I not with one of Greets. I was ready to lye with him for the whetstcne
(II. 2h) ~

if colds made then chill. the fier of their Zeale would not suffer then
to kindle fire in their tents (I. 512)

Did you euer see no kisse ny Daughter? you.are deceiued. it was my wife.
And if zon.tho§ght so young a pesos vnfit for so old a person. -- you
lust knows that silusr hairec delight in golden lockes (II. h57)

If the Gods thoughts no soorne to become beastes. to obtayne their best
beloued. shall Eunhues be no unce in chcunging his cappie to gayne
his Lady! (1. 236)

76

I charge you all. if you owe any duetie to your king. to goo presently
vnto the temple of Bacchus. mlarre not with your selues. agree in one
for your king. if euer you took iiydas for your lawful king (III. 126)

when she saw opportunitis. she asked no whether the Italian wer my
nessenger. of if he were. whether his embassage were true. which question
I thus aunswered (II. 73-714)

Therefore Heptune. if euer Venus stoods thee in stead. furthered thy
fancies. or shall at all times be at they c’é’naund. let eyther Diana
bring her Virgins to a continuall massacre. or release Gupid of his
Iartyrdone (II. l+68)

gsuer you lousd.you haus found the like if euer you shell lone. you
shall taste no less. (II. 51)

if 3.5g Thetis went about to keeps hir some free the doing of his countrey
cornice. there was also a wise Ylysses in the courts to bewraye it

(no 197)

In W instances [Iths conditional verb refers to the past free the
point of view of the moment of speaking but to future tine from the point
of view of the time of the main verb. In most instances the conditional
verb is here equivalent to 'should' or ‘would' plus infinitive. may

night therefore be classed with those referring to future tine.

Consider with thy selfe Fidus. that s fairs women with-cut constancie. is
not vnlyke vnto a greens tree without fruit. resembling the Counterfeit

‘ that Pruitiles nude for Flora. before the which if one stoode directly.
it seemed to weeps (II. 77)

thou dost imitate Scyron a Procruetes. who framing a bed of brasse to
their own bipes. caused it to be placed as a lodging for all passengers.
mif he wer to long for ye bed. they cut off his legs for catching cold
(Ile 97'985

Achimenis the hearbe was of such force. that it was thought if it wer
thrown into the battaile. it would make all the soldiers tremble (H.177)

To that end I haue euer since carried these Lots about as. that if I not
with fit company I night deuide my booty among then (I. 500)

And so I leaue him. neither in Athens nor ele where that I know: But
this order he left with his friends. that if m newes came or letters.
that they should direct them to the Mount of Silixsedra. where I leans
hin. eyther to his musing or Muses (II. 228) ’

2) Conditions referring to action or status in the future. The
subjunctive notion could here be “pressed by 'should‘ or ’would’ plus

(infinitive.

7?

Selfe loue ys not that lens that we talks of. but rather the kinds
knitting of twee hartes in one. of which sorts ou.had a faithfull
louer what should.you lose by being faithfull unto him? (I. #59)

If Camilla. one wounded with your beautis (for vnder that name I comprehende
all other vertues ) shold sue to Open his affections. -- what aunewere
would you.nake. if you gone your consent. or what excuse if you deny
hys curtesie (II. 163-6h)

If your H1ghneese would be aduised by nee. then would I rob for kingdoms.
and if I obteyned.fain would I see him that durste call the Donguercur
a theefe (III. 131)

Either Euphuee and Philautus stoode in needs of friend shippe. or were
ordained to be friendes: vpon so short warning. to make so scene a
conclusion night seems in nine Opinion if it continued.nyrsculous. if
khaken off. ridiculous (I. 199)

Great. Our lines shall neuer want to do him good. 231; Nor yet our
death. if he in daunggr stood (III. 3%)

3) Conditions referring to generic action or status.

so woenen if theygknewe what excellency were in then. I fears use use
should neuer winne then to their wills. or weans then from their ninds
(I. 217)

For as the horse if'he knew his owns strength were no wayes to be brideled
(I. 211)

If fathers knew but how to leans I Their children wit as they do wealth. I
6 could con trains them to receiue / That physicke which brings perfect
health. I I: world would not admiring stand. [on wonans face and wonans
hand (III. R90)

They were not Philosophers. i£;£hgz_§ng§ not their dueties (II. 32h)

If the course of youth had any respect to the staffs of‘age. or the lining

fwian any regards to the dying moulds. we would with greater care whfiiws
werejggung. shunne those things which should griue vs when we be olde

I. )

Sweet youthes. if you knew what it were to sens your sweets blond. you
would not so foolishly go about to spend it (II. 352)

O my doors Himphes. if zou.knewe hows louing thoughts stains lonely faces.
you.woulde bee as careful to haue the one as Inspotted. as the other
beautiful (11. 11.51;)

h) Conditions referring to action or status in the present. In these
conditions there is more or lees an implication of unreality. and they

approach therefore in character the so-called condition contrary to fact.

But it would be hazardous to draw the line hard and fast.

78

I could stay :11 day with.him. if I feared not to be shent (III, 37)
Ifflyou had the foddring of the sheep. you would make the Church like

 

Primero. foure religion: in it. and note onevlike another (III.h05)
Yen go about impossibilitiee. wele no such ohzge, and ifyyee had it.
yee would be wearie of it (III. not) A ‘ %
And therfore good Diphues e Philautue content your eeluee w thin. y
to be curious in things you ihould not enquire off. if you know thi?’
they appertein not vnto you: if‘you knew thflflnot. they ogfiot.hinder
you (II. h2)
It wore no meruell if zgu.knew'ny none (III. 3M9)
Sir. there lieth a purse vnder your teete; it I thought it were not youre.

I would take it vp (11. “52)

In many of the above instances. particularly in negotivo statemente.

the action could be expressed by the intensive 'did' plue the infinitive.

I! it were knauery for {cure to meet in e Tanerne;'your worthipe wot
well there were other foure (III. 223)

If El thoughts were woluish. thy hopee night he no thy comparison is.
beastly (III. 311)

If’nz tongue were able to vtter the ioyee that my'hearth hath oonoeiued.
I (cog; no though I be vol heloued. yet I ehouhd|herdlye bee belieued
(I. 2 )

Ardhitag y. Tarentine retourning from warre and finding his grounde oner-
growen with wooden and tourned 7p with howlee. sent for his Farmour
vnto ihome hee seyde: It I were not engryo I woulde make thee repent
thy 111 husbandry (I. 278

It Phillie were now to take conneeyle. shee would not be so foolish to
hang hir eelfe (I. EDS)

1g_a11 were in iest. it woe to tried weighing the place. --. (11. 99)

If he were fire. the See would quench those colon. or the flame turne
him into cindere (III. 308)

If all the wo§;d_and lone were young; /And truth in euery Sheepheards

w”tango”? These pretty pleasures night no mono. I To line with thee,
and be thy lone (III. hSO)

(I'll epeeke e bould word) if the Qgeene herself (God sane her Grace)

(were here). ehe might be seen' to eat or it (I. 1492)

He Father Hermit. I am of Alexandere ninde. if there were as many worlds.
as there be cities in the world. I would neuer leaue vntill I had eeene
all the worlds. and each oitie in euerie world (II. 28)

If they were as you.eeoount then. but deed pictures. they were lykelie
to make another Pigmalion of you, rather than you.would he bounde to
the lane of one (I. h61)

Tush it were no loue if it were eerteyne. and a smell conquest it ie to
ouer- owe those that neuer reeieteth (I‘ 211)

But it nay'be thou layeet that oarde for y' eleuetion of Naples like an
Astronomer. If it wer so I forgiue thee. for I must beleeue thee (II.86)

79

For if the father were desirous to examine hie eonne in that which he
hath learned. the mayeter woulde too more carefull what he did teach
(I. 278)

Padane. if lone were not a thing beyonde reason. we might then giue a
reason of our doings (II. h55)

9g. 0 3 you stand men the weight iwel if she were twenty graines lighter '
I would not refuse her. prouided alwayes she be not clipt within the
ringe (III. 267)

If there were.ee diners dreams, a God that would reuenge the oppression

five! the widdowee and fatherlesee. --then woulde the people eyther
stande in greater awe. or owe more loue towards their God (I. 291)

If it were your chaunce to trauaile to Sienna. and to see as ouch there

““es I haue tolde you here. whether would you chose for your wife the
faire foole. the witty wanton. or the crooked Saint (II. 62)

If it were for thy prefernent nnd.his amendment. I wish you were boflh
married (I. 322)

I! the patience of men were not greater then the peruerseneese of women.
I ehould then fall from a question to a quarrell (II. 10h)

My case were light Hophestion. and not worthy to he called lone. i£_
reason we a remedy, or sentences could salue. that sense enact
oonceiue (II. 331)

It was not in vayne that Crates would often say. that if 1 were lawfull
euen in the market place. hee would crye out (I. 268)

If your sinnes were as Crinosin they shall to node whiter than Snow.4&
though they were as red as Scarlet they shall be made like white hell
(I. 302)

Lear. What idost thou nooks vs? Gun. do: but if go were here she would
make moves at the proudest of you (III. 233)

If all the Earthe were paper white I And all the an were incke / Twere
not inough for no to write I as my peers hart do thinke (III. M52)

l’e have here conditional statements (particularly those involving
'were') generally known as 'contrery to fact.“ Whether the conditions in
the first group of citations are contrary to fact it would be difficult to
say. Indeed many grammarians would not so analyze then. It could be
argued on the other hand that the citations in the second group are not
all conditions contrary to fact (inspite of their use of 32:3).The fact
is that it is difficult to say Just what‘a condition contrary to fact is.
Is it an assumption of facts that aren't so? Then'If I were you.'or 'If
I 3353 in France now‘ is a condition contrary to fact. A condition
contrary to fact muet then refer to the present or the past. since we can't

predicate linguistically the facts of the future. 'If I were in France next

not
summer -' would then not be condition contrary to fact. since I canAsay

now that it assumes facts that won't be so in the future. Similarly ’If
I 3553 ever in a plane accident ' or ‘I know what I'd do if I‘gggg ever
(elected) a member of the group.’ Again one may assume a condition that
is obviously contrary to fact and add a conclusion that is ttill possible;
as. 'If I 3353 you. I'd do so and eo.‘ Or one may assume a condition
contrary to fact the unreality of which is attested by the unreality of
the conclusion following; as. 'If "9.522! where she was. we shouldn’t be
searching for her.‘ The person of the subject too enters in. I can say.
’If I thought you.were lying --.‘ but if I use a second or third person
subject I should hare to change the tense to the present or change the
meaning: ‘If you think I an lying ---,' It is probably better to say that
the past tense ('were‘included) is used to espress conditions that are
felt to be more or less unreal. impossible. unlikely than to state cate-
gorically'that the subjunctive 3253 always eXpresses conditions contrary

to fact.

5) Conditions referring to action or status in the past (contrary to

facéi

Amerula. if you were not bitter. your name had been ill bestowed (111.138)

If the sirropes of Hacaonias. or the Verses of nous. or the Satyren of
Dipsas were of force to none the ninde. they all three would not hens
bone matired with the torments of lone (II. 117)

Madame quoth Surius you haue caught a Frag. if I be not deceiued. and
therfore as good it were not to hurt him. as not to cats hifl. but i;
all this whileyyou.angled to hone a bytte at a loner. you.should haue
reed no bitter medicines. but pleaeaunt heightee (II. 173)

The unreality of the condition is here attested by the unreality in
the conclusion. The verbs in the condition.are preterites but they are.

as in older English generally. equivalent to the so called psst perfect

61

(were: had been. angled a had angled).

Frequently conditional statements such as those appear in Lyly in
' W
elliptical form. Butzgh not yield any special points other than those
already discussed or to be discussed. and I shall content myself with a

single citation by way of illustration.

In the like manner fereth it with me (Right Honourable) who neuer before
handling the peneill. did for n: fyret counterfeite. coulour mine own.
Euphuee. being of this minde, that if it wer lyked. I would dreu'nore
besides Eumhuee. if lonthedlr grieue none but Puphuee (II. 3).

The verbe"to be.“ 'to have."to do' can be umed as full verb: or
as auxiliaries. A: full verbs they have been included in the foregoing
discussion. is an auxiliary 'vere‘ is need to form 1) the past perfect
tense of verbs of motion (of which I have no citatione from Lyly) and 2)
the past passive voice; ’had‘ in used to form 1) the past perfect tense
and 2) peat perfect passive voice; 'did' is used to emphasize the past

action of another verb.

'were'

And if you be angrye because I on planned. certee I deeme you woulde be
content if I were deceased (I. 245}

Yet if I were as fully Eerzwaded of thy conversion. as thou vouldest haue
use of thy confession. I might happely doe that. which now I will not
(II. 1&6)

who beholding hir vglye shape in a glaeee. cmilyfig eayd: This face were
feire, if it were tourned. noting that the inward motions would make
the outward favour but counterfeit (II, 61)

If one were burnt. I thinks wee women woulde say. he died of a cold (11.397)

Thus all night tossing in my bedde. I determined the next daye, if an e
opoortunitie were offeredl to offer 3130 my importunate cornice 111.63)

11[your tongue were made of the cane flesh that your heart in. your warden

“fluould bee as your t oughtee are (II. 3hfl) ,r’

If the eighee of the heart were conuerted into eloquepe of the tongue -

I would desire (right worthy auditor?) that all those eighee which are
neeembled together in your treats. might be centered in my heart (1.510)

8?.

would hate euen your owne eel! I: you were but wedded unto your
selfe (I. M59)

Cranercie 1 Mother Boobies, we are all pleeed. if you were for your painee

(127,205)

ihadi

Farewell sweet Parents, yet, to be mine, mfortunete Parente 3 Howe bleeeed
had you beene in barrennee 3 how 118.pr had I been. if I had not beenei
m. M65) ,

1 my selfe had bone happye if I had bene vufortunnte (I, Zbl)

If I had teed the polycie that Huntere doe, in catching of Hienn.1t
might be also. I had now won you (II. 66)

And verily if I had not loued thee vol. I wold heme ewallowed nine own
sorrow in 31I§§3*11. 213) ~

Who new but his violet. who but Kietrie Freunoie. when if once euerz_g£y
he had not soone, he wold hone beene no eolen. that no man should hone
"Zoeno him (Ii. 185)‘

If my advise hndfitnken place. Mydee that now sitteth ouer head and eeree
in crownee. had worn rpon.hie heed nanymkinge orownee. and been conquerour
of the world. that now is comnunder of drosse (III. 125)

I§_eickeneeee had not put nee to silence and the weakneeee of’ny body

'w—Eindred the willingneese of my'm nde. thou.e“ouldeet haue had a more
«needy aunowere. and I no cause of excuse (I. 319)

But vnlease Euohuee had inveigled thee thou.heddeet yet bone constant.
yea but if Egghuea had not eeene thee willyng to be wonne. he would neuer
heue weed thee (I. 222-335)

If Philrutue hed loued Lucilla.he woulde neuer bane cuffered Eunhuee to

*fihaue eeene hir (I. 210

I but Philautue preyee at the parting. if she ha thee, ehe
would neuer haue eunewered thee (II, 130)

There is verie good workmanship in it. but the matter is but base: if the
stuffe had bone as good as the sold. your daughter hed.bene no wise a:

. Ehe is beautifull (III. 176)

If it had etoode on thy head I ehould hone called it a horne (III. INS)

This is a wise answer: her going caucd hie conning. for if she had loge
gone, he had nere come (III, 369)

Hoe ereeta you at my suite for a horee. Bio. The more due hee 13.3.
hee had arested a.nnre in stead of an horse. it had bin but a elight
ouereight (III, 213) .

‘lgzyou had beene n haiden too I neede not to haue feared. because you
are faindr (II. £61)

I perceiue eober men tel most lien. for in vino veritag. If the; had drunke
wine. they would haue tolde the truth.TIII. 199)

l£Lthey'had stayed, the etockee shoulde hone eteied then (III. 220)

I dare not eay of an ingratefull minde. But i; Pandora had been well advieed.
This dare I say. that Steeiae had been eparde (III, 255)

If these_youthes had bene trained VP in the companye of any Philosonher.
they would neuer haue bone e0 dieolute in theyr lyfe. or so resolute in
their owne conceitee (I. 269)

 

 

 

83

But it was destinie. for if I had not hone gathered from the tree in the
budde. I should booing bloven hone proued a blast (I. 325).

or as mothers deale with their children for worms, who put their hitter
seedee into eweete reasons. if t*is ordegyhad‘ygene cheerued in thy
discourse, that entorlasing oowre tauntes with snared counsell. hearing
eevoll n.3entle raine. es veing a hard snaffle, thou.mighteet hone
done more with the whieke of a wand. then now thou.¢anst with the prick
of the spur (II. 100)

I Mellacrites. if thy tongue had been turned to gold before thou gaueet
our king euoh oounoel, Mydas heart had been ful of ease, and thy mouth
of gold (III. 125)

If the onegyad hone emnloyed to thrift . the other to learning. it had

‘ bone horde to coniecture (I. 195)

This ratcatcher (as ch ildren do when any things is found) cried. 'Hali‘ P
which I denying.l(he)»c1aimed.adl. because he kill.ed the soles, and if
the melee had not been destroyedl there had been no garden (I. h18)

Tush I let- vs alone: we will persuade them that all {ale out for the but;
for if vnderhande trio match had hone concluded, they both had hen ooosned
(III, "212)

In these citations 'had' is more or less equivalent of 'ehould have'

or 'would have.’

'did'

You can do lyttle y! you cannot naister your VOTQ‘. Co. I should do leeee
it my worde am not maister no (I. M61)

know this y‘ the best simples are very eimple. if the phieition could not
applie them. that precious stones were no better then Pebbles. if ‘idariee
did not knowe then. that the heat friende is worse then a fee, if a non
doe not vee him (II,1h9)

Ile warrant the good old man meant. -- fibere if hapnelie moot did not 1811
yet all vould boo tired (111. 1+09)

If the eacredh?ndegof amitie did delyght thee. why diddeet thou.breake
ouém? a, a”

But if Pandora did conceiue those gifte. That Ioue can giue. ehe would
esteeme his louev(III. 250)

If women were not frendly foo: -—-Gr if none suites they did disdaine to
answer them they would refreine (III. ME?)

Phil. Why should you feare? the God requiroth no boy.-- Phil. I am glad
he dish not tho. because if ho~didiy I ehould hone alsfm use to feare

II. 6)

Foolish vench. what dhould the boy doe here. if he bring not remedies with

him? you think belike I dould sleep, if I did but see him (II. 399)

There are a few instances in Lyly. though not as many es one night

suspect. of the substitution of indicative for subjunctive forms in such

at

conditional statements. The clearest instancee of such eubstitutione
occur in the eecond person singular. lees frequently in the third singular.
and-they most frequently involve the verbs to be. to have. and to doI

though there are s few instances of other verbs.

If thou knewegt the secret of this Science. the cunning woulde make thee
so proude that thou wouldeet disdaine the outward puerpe (II. W5)

Ferewel Diogenes. thou needest not home scraped rootee. if thou wouldest
heue followed Alexander. Dies. Nor thou.hane followed Alexflder. if thgg
hadet scraned 111.351)

if thou.hagg2§1_l_§;ngd the first poyut of banking thou.wouldet hone
learned to hane held fast (I. 236 )

If‘thou.hadst hen silent I would.haue iudged this picture to hone hen
framed of yI eodain (1. 271-72)

if thou.haddeet as great respect to dye well as thou hast care to line
w\u'antonly. thou wouldeet with ggorgtes seeke how thou nigteet yelde
to death (I. 308)

And if euer thou diddest loue me. manifest it in this. that heerefter thou
naaii write to nee (II. 139)

If thou diddest determine with thy selfe at the firste to be false. why
diddeet thou sweare to bee true! (I. 231$)

Thou waet euer carefull for my estate. ”when thou wast earnest to ‘iue
my oounseile. I waxed engrie to hears it. if thou diddest suspect me
'rpa‘Viust cause. I fol out with thee for euery light occasion (II. 1&2)

if thou diddest make to trio ly wit. thou thoughtest me very dull (11.17?)

For if Laban was for Iesob eake so hleet./and f'ultrphars hap. by Iosephs
neane no lease/Our hap. our blieee. our ioyes wherein we rest9/For when
it is. we must of force confuse (III. 1429)

If Home ‘of Romano Triumph" earst was oft so glad / And likewise Greece
of Grecians Trgghgg ioyed: I If 12E! of Wm their onlie mirth
haue had / then England leap. and laugh aloud for Queene enioyl.(III.h28)

If thou waet 3335139 both falselye and forgedlye to deceiue nee. why diddest
'thmu flatter and dissemble with nee at the firstet (1.23h)

If thou wert banished rpon choller greater is thy oredite in sustayninge
wronge then thine enemies in committinge iniurie (I. 315)

I haue fulfilled thy requeet. —-but if thou.wert as willing to read them,
as I was to send them. or as ready to follow than. as desirous to home
then. it shall not repent thee of thy labour. nor me of my cost (I. 313)

I would pray thee to ioyne area. if thou wort not teo little for her
gflatuee (Io l4‘93)

he last four instances represent relatively new forms of, the second
person preterite singular of 'to be.';'wert' and ‘mst.’ 't'ert' adds the -t

to the regular subjunctive stem and ’waet' to the regular indicative singular.

35

Greenariens hose subsequently differentiated the two forms and.have come
to consider 'wert' as subjunctive and 'wast' as indicative. but certainly

in these citations from Lyly there is no such distinction.

Ramsey states that 'wert' is the sole example of a form found only

MS) Curme. Leonard. Brown. Sweet. Fernald. Fowler.

in the subjunctive.
Onions. hurray‘s‘gggfigg, and the flew International Dictionary. second
edition. are content to say the‘ 'west' is indicative and 'wert' subjunctive-
Joseph and Elisabeth wright nention.that in the older language (especially
colloquial) 'was' and 'were' were indiscriminately used for either singular
or plural. indicative or subjunctive. ha But in the sixteenth century the
second person singular ’were’ was supplanted by the newer formations ’wast‘
and 'wert’ with ~t from 'art.‘ These ferns were coeeon in the seventeenth
and eighteenth centuries. The custom of using 'wast' for the indicative
and 'wert' for the subjunctive was established in the early seventeenth
century. Resfield supports these remarks and adds that 'was' is derived
free the distinct rod§.fore 'wes.‘ which is OE in the second person
singular preterite had the fore 'wtaere' (from the preterite plural stem);
that the fore 'wast' was formed aualogically after 'ehal-t' and 'wil-t'

5°)

and was ”wrongly placed“ as second person.

5 In statements of ouncession

Conesssive statements are statements that specify something granted.

 

2; 5839-91 3813307. Mligh Language and mlish Grammar. p. 1:13.
Joseph and Elisabeth Mary ‘uright. An lenentary Historical New English
Grammar. p. 193.
50) J.C.B’esfield. main}: Grammagut and Present; p. 35h.

36

conceded. or acknowledged for some specific purpose. In Lyly such statements
generelly take the verb in the subjunctive. The modal equivalent is 'nay'

(‘night' for the preterite) plus an infinitive.

Concession in Lyly follows sudh particles as 'albeit' and 'albe.'

I have four citations from Lyly.

which things (Lucille) albeit they be sufficient to reproue the lightnesee
of someone. yet can it not couince euery one of lewdeness (I. 218-19)
Touching the yelding to lone. albeit theyr hartes scene tender. yet they
harden then lyke the stone of Sicilia (I. 20E)
Yet hears no. newbcone Swayne. / Alto th seenl feature ggt no sale I
But honest truth vpon thy nouell tale. 7 Yet (for this world is full
of subtiltie) / we wish thee goo with vs for companie (III. 377)
Albe she looks eore hlithe on Genulo. / Her heart is in the dyall of her
W eye. [*Thet poynte me here (III. 375) .

Concession in Lyly is very common after 'although.‘

An? elthogg% I he no Phisition. yet haue I hens vsed to attend sicko persons
1 .55‘5 ‘
Although there bee none so ignoraunt that doth not know. neither any so
inpudent that will not confesse. friendship to bee the iewell of
hunaine ioye (I. 197)
Ind heere right Honourable. although thelgistorie scene vnperfect.
I hope your Lordship will pardon it (II. 6)

But all these graces altho the he to be wondered at. yet hir politique
gouernenent (II. 2155

But to aunswere of three inconuenience. which I would chuse (altho an
each treaten e mischiefe) I must needes take the wise wanton (II. 53)

Le touching the authoritie of Scriptures W nanye arguments
which do prone yea and enforce the wicked to confesse hat the Scriptures
cane fron God (I. 297)

in the which is plainly to be seene. what wit can. s will do. if it be
well employed. which discourse following. although it bring lesse .

pleasure to your youthfull nindss then his first course. yet will it
bring more profits (I. 259)

And although thy sweets heart binds thee by othe always to holds a candle
at hir shrine. an to effer thy do Ayen to thine owns destruction. yet
80s (I. 253)

Althoughe Phileutus thincke himselfe of vertue sufficient to winne his

louer. yet shall hee not obtains Lucille (I. 228)
althgggh the loadstone drawe yron. yet it cannot nous golds (I. 228)

3?
Concessions in Lyly are many times no frequeht after 'though'.

‘i‘h Eu use. ehhorre y’ beautie of Lucille. yet wil he not sbsteine
from 55 company of a grauc maiden (I. 258)
I thincke one may also with safe conscience reuerence the modest sex of
honest maydene. though he forsweere the lewde sort of vnchast minions
(I. 253)
Though Eon be made softe with fire it returneth to his hardnes (I. 191)
Though the stile nothing; deliglfi the dayntie ears of the curious sitter.
yet wil the matter recreate the ninde of the courteous Boader (I. 180)
Though than be enemoured of some lady thou shalt not be enchaunted (I. 212)
17nd it may be that though thou crake of thine own courage. thou nayst easely
lose the conquest (I. 235)

Tho the be inni of lone bri delyght. the ends bringeth destruction
II. 238)

Euery Gentleman will be their peers though theyjhg noble. and enery pesmnt
their Lord if they be gentle (II. 26f

the other you say reeds for to passe the time. though it bring smell
pastime (II. 9)

and therefore. though it be my turne to speaks after you. I will striue
in thankfulneTto gee before you (I. 1459)

We care not for a Scottish nist. them it wet vs to the skin. you shel
he‘sure your cockseombe shall not be mist; but pearet to the skuls (III.39N)

If thou sue me for a double naine. I care not the the Iurie allow thee ,
treble damages. it cannot amount to much (III. E#135

A merry companion is as good as a wagon. for you shalbe sure to ryds
though yeoégg e foote (III. 278)

hey. if you set all on hazard. though I be a pore wench I an as herdie as
you both (III. 200)

The souldiere be valiant. I must not therfors thinks my quarrels
inst (III. 1607

Ehou h hande bee golds. yet I lust not thinks to span ousr the seine
Ocean (III. lhOS
The last dogge oftentimes catcheth the Hare. though the fleetest turns

hin (II. 178)

Hy senses annot lost though my labour bee. and therefore (II. 175)

To be constant what thing more requisite in lone. when it shall always be
greens like the Iuie. Mgh the Sun paroh it. that rebel euer be hard
like y° true Diamond (II. 175)

Concessions in Lyly are also frequent after 'eo.‘

Go where thou wilt lo I be rid of thee (III. 287)

but in the neon season whet pastine shal we vse to pesos the tine? I
wil agree to any. so it be not to telke of Ions (III. 136)

0 then. so it be a match you care not (III. 177)

Belike you lone her wel. that you care not though a1 be lost so she be
..:. (II. 356)

It skils not so we be together (II. B38)

QL‘

88

concessions occur in Lyly also after 'provided.' though not so

frequently-

I would not refuse her. provided slwgzgfshe be not clipt with the rings
(III. 267)
I will. by lone my father. I protest: Provided {irotI that théz Eetition
hee. not hnrtfnll to thy selfe. nor harme to me III. 3
In all these passages the form of the subjunctive is the prose? t.
The preterite subjunctive is of course possible. but it is much less

frequent. In the first three of the following instances the preterit. is

no doubt a matter of the sequence of tenses. In the fourth 'vere' implies

something of an unrealistic concession.

So 1. although I loued.Philantns for his good properties . yet seing
Euphuu to excell him. I ought byw Nature to lyke him better (I. 206)

Euphues thoughe hee knows himselfe'northy euery any to hone a good countenaunoe.
yot canlde hee not perceine hir willinge any way to lends hym a friendly
looke (I. 200)

For whatsoeuer he painteth it is for his pleasure. and woe must think for
our profit. for spells: had his reward thoggh he new not the works (II.h2)

I care not whose hand I were in. so I were out of yours (III. 2L0)

I care not who I were. so I were not Manes (II. 328)

0 but he not partial. gins then their due thongh.the1 wort dincls. so
will I. and excuse than for taking unis money at interest (III. RGI)

Elliptical expressions of concession are common. but they offer

nothing new. and I list only e few by way of illustration.

30(shalt thou.doe better than otherwise. though neuer so well as I wish.
11. 33
Bother I on come to claims my children. though both fooles. and to deliner
yours. both honing (III. 225) '
for as the precious stone Chaleziss. being throwen into the fire keepeth
stil‘ his coldnesse. not to he warned with any heate. so my heart
although dented at with ya erroves of thy burning affections. -~
shall alwayes his hardneese (II. 139) [hots on 'donted nt':"no other
instanoc in 11.3.1). 3]

39

Eflie is Delphos. Sacred Apbllo. whose Creoles be all divine.‘§§235h
doubtfullz ennswere poore Hydns. end pitie him (III. 158)

Venue. Goo loyter not. noremistake your shafte.‘(Exit Cupid;> How venue.
hast thou.plaide a cunning parte. though not curreunt (II. hll)

Neyther was I much vnlike these Albaie lubbers in.my lyfe (though ferre
vnlike then in beliefs) which laboured till they were colde (1. 250-51)

You see marriage is deetinie; made in heauen. though consumnted on earth
(III. 237) ‘

but that I bane learned by experience. y' to reason of Kings or Princes.
tééthzuer bone much nielyked of y‘ wise. though much desired of foolee
(II. -1) f

I have only two instances from Lyly of the substitution of an indicative

for e subjunctive form in statements of concession.

Truely I were very cruell and horde hearted 3! I should not lone thee:
horde hearted albeit I on not. but truely lone thee I cannot. uhone I
doubts to be my loner (I. 221)

Lady. I neither flatter you nor please my selfe (although it pleaseth
you so to coniecture) for I heue elveyee cbeerued this (II. 135)

90

Chapter III

THE NCDAI SUEJUNCTIYE I?.JOHH LYIY

Throughout the discussion of the formal subjunctive in the preceding
chapter it will haue been noticed that I frequently referred to the nodal
subjunctive. The GE inflecticnal subjunctive had as its distinguishing
marks the general endings -e in the singular and -on in the plural.

(neither of these was well fitted to resist the tendency towards the drapping
of endings. and thus in tine the language came to have no distinctive
subjunctive endings. In place of the old subjunctive forms the language

acquired newer forms with nodal auxiliaries

Since Lyly's time the modal subjunctives have become more frequent at
the eXpense of the formal. The new forms offered the material advantage
of denoting secondary notions. shading the attitude of uncertainty. of which
Ehre modification of the finite verbal form was utterly incapable. In
Lyly's time one subdvnctive form - the formal - was need to sprees various
shades of subjunctive meaning without enecifying the shade intended.
then the several models replaced the single formal subjunctive they could
differentiate more clearly the several shades of meaning. The medals
therefore have added to the language means of’expressing more distinctive
aspects: they offer a more polite. courteous. and yleasing way of expressing
ideas. even to the extent of turning a harsh commend into a soft and inoffen-
sive suggestion. Our language is the richer and more varied by reason of

The model subjunctives include the auxiliaries 'mey.‘ 'shall.' ‘vill.’
'can.’ 'dnre.‘ 'night.’ 'would.‘ 'should.‘ 'eould.‘ 'durst.‘ and 'nust.‘
Originally these models were independent verbs and followed the patterns
of other verbs. developing full systems of inflections: present and preterite
ferns. indicative and subjunctive forms. etc. fishy of these distinctions.
because of the semantic character of the medals. in time ceased to have
any validity and disappeared. In Old English these verbs are classed as
s.group as the preterite—present verbs. They were strong verbs. belonging
to the several strong categories. lost their present infinitive and present
tense forms. came to use the old preterite forms as presents. and
develoPed new pretsrite seek forms s-d s new'present infinitive. In
Old English all those verbs still had,sn infinitive form. and many had also

Mr»
a present portioieial forn: Subsequently t see three ferns disappeared
in all cases. and we‘hnve left only two forms. the present form and the
preterite form. These verbs do not take the irfinigé sign 'to' or the
'-e' ending of the t ird person singular. In tie c_se of ’dere' and 'need'
the present t’ird person sometimes has the 'os' ending and sosetimes not.
'kust.‘ originally a week preterite. has shifted a second time and has

recently become a present farm, with no preterite form for the time being.

The two forms that survive. the present and the preterite. have come
to less any distinction in time. They now both generally refer to present
or future time. If there is any distinctionff present it is that the
preterits forms espress a weaker or more remote possibility. the modal:
have had to devlep a new way of eXpressing past time. Ordinary verbs can
express seepleted action by means of orpsnded forms - an auxiliary ('to

be.‘ ’to have‘) plus a past participle. But the models have no past

«
x

92"

participle. They therefore :59 the present or past form with the Iocalled
perfect infinitive of the other verb; as.'I might have said oo.’ 'the but
may have arrived by tT‘is time,’ NJ I should have taken your advice.‘

'1! you could have been there.’ 'if it would have done any good‘ (in

these hast three instances 'shuuld have,‘ 'could have,’ ’would havo’ a

'had‘). and ‘he must have gone.’ I am aware that Jeepsrsen‘regards ‘must'

' 11
in the last inqtence as a present tense, but I here humbly disagree

with him.

I do not include among :59 modal subjunctivas the expanded tonnes with
forms of 'téPe,’ 'to have.‘ and 'to do.’ They are often used an finitbfl
verbs with full forms; as tense auxiliarias they are capable of fern ‘
changes in the third.parson singular presant and in the case of 'to be‘
in the past tense, as ‘1! she has (have) seen the picture. she is raga;
to gahama' and '1! 1t were(be) finished. we would leave.' For those figpbnn
thee: verbs have been considered in the discussion of the formal cub- ‘é~.
Junctivo. fiesidea tho modale the todal subjunctivo includes ‘10t.’ \
originlally an imperative which expressaa pronosed action rather than
factzaa. 'let no play ball.’ ‘Let' acquired this function to fulfill a‘\

practical need for a nhrasal hortative subjunctive during the devalop-

meat of the language.

 

1) 'fiunt' is listed by all the grammarians except Onions an a proiint
tense form. C.T.Cnions (An Advanced Eng;iah Syntax. p0. 139-h0)
says that 'must' is an auxiliary of past as well as of present
time. He given two citations: '30 must go' (present) andflfiif
he had looked. he must have seen the light of the approadhing
train' (past). 'Hust' has no tansa significance; the matter of
time. as in the case of all such auxiliaries. 1- indicated by
the following infinitivn.

/

93

' Every granmnrnr and grammnrian has a distinct set of principles.
ruloa‘and duplications. fieitber linguists nor grammnrianl are agreed an
to the eOOpB and respective'functione of the nodal auxiliarieel despereen
denies tfio-exietence of module as such but reconnizes the nhrasal use of
'let'. Fe classifies 'mny,‘ 'ehonld.‘ etc., in inqtancee like (if he
may come —--;' an twaginntive nee of tense. lien in (if I had money enough.
I should may you.‘ 'had' is considered as a former preterite subjunctive
but here indicative due to leveling of forme.2) Curme recognizes the modal:
and their usages either as outntive or potential subjunctive., He mentions
that 'will' and 'can' are often indicativee but that 'can' is fast

.3)

becoming a more forceful subjunctive than 'max. According to Onions

'may,’ 'Qhall.‘ 'will.‘ 'might,"ebould.' 'vnuld.' 'conld' are commonly
nodal auxiliaries but 'can' never is a.noda1 auxiliary.u) Sonncnechein
classifies 'can’ as an indicative and the rest of the nodale as either
indicptive or subjunctive. He says that the medals 'ehall' and 'vill'
always follow the grnmmnriane' usage rule.5) Sweet dividee the attitude.
of mind into thought-for- and fact-fort. Under fact-form in found the
indicative mood while under thought-form are the subjunctive and peri-
ohrnstic moods. The periphrnntic mood includes the conditional flood

with the auxiliaries 'ehould' and ’vonld’ and the permissive mood with the

auxiliaries 'may' and 'might! Sweet does not mention any other auxiliaries.)

According to Poutsma auxiliaries are either subjunctive or conditional

2) Otto Jeepereen, Essentials of Engligh grammar. or. 162-257.
fl) 6.6. Curme. Szgtgg. on. 225 511.

) C.T.Qnione. fin thnnced Enriish Syntax. pp. 38-138.

.) B..§.F~:onnenechein. A “few English Grammar. PMIU, film-15'.

Ferry Sweet. W. Part I. pp. 107-108-

 

:71;

forms. louler includes as subjunctive those statements commonly intro-

duced by the conjunctions 'if.‘ 'leet.' 'thcugh.’ etc.. end for the modal.

8
he sets up the potential category. later Fowler says, "It in quantionnble

V

whether any thing has been gained ~-- by the introduction of'the potential
mode, -- In exprcseions like {if I should go,’ 'if I may ride' we hove
the potential form (or indicative) under a condition 3 the eubjunctivc
node."g) smart states that tho princioel oufiiliaries are 'be,’ 'have.’
'may.’ 'can,‘ 'must,' 'will.’ 'shell.’ 'do' and their respective pact

' and 'do' Kay be complete verbs. but the
r\
\-a

forms. '39.’ 'nav‘ ' 'will
I

94¢

root are nodal auyiliariee.

These models ngfcred in meaning originally from other verbs in that
they did rot deaignete or indicate an objective act, no the verb 'eat'
does or the verb 'run.‘ out rather a subjunctive att tude toward action
ex»reased by sane other verb. Their semantic character therefore brought

‘3»
them into close nlz§dment with the various verbal shades ezpreeeed by
the subjunctive. It is to be ycintvd out that this subjective attitude
could be more clearly orpressed in the first person than in the second or
third. Purifiernorc they €?pr883£d an attitude toward action that had,
not. or had not yet. taken place. and they hvcane therefore closely

associated with the e.yre3310ns of future time.

As the old formal subjunctive weakened those medals by degreoe took

 

 

8) H. Foutsma. Mood and “ense of the English Verb, u. 5.
1: :‘H-OCOI‘OHI-‘ler. 3:114:13“? 'traiflliildr. Part Iv. 7)!\. 311-12.

 

, m . *‘* 1
1c~.)-—-.‘1”.‘.“;o.» mu 313-14.

5.5.3wurt. Ynglieh Feview Grammar, pp, 53-71.

over subjunctive functio-s. Sometimes they became colorless key words.
with no meaning of their own. useful only in indicating subjunctive functions.
In other instances something of their original meanings poraisted. In
such inztunces it is difficul‘ to treat them as function words Only.
Rarticulurly: in tn? case of 'will' and 'vould' (meaning ’to be willing
to. to viot.' etc.) as seen in the citations from gyly as 3311 as from
citations from current Engligh; u3.'if you will goe with me.---’ (I, MQZ)
'--— if you will give euro to the tale of Eidus.~o-’ (II. #3). 'If I would
play with picturea.--' (II. 339). 'if your fliuhnesse would be advised

by mee,—--' (III, 131). 'I will (would) lino alone,’ 'Lf you will(vould)
not do away -—{;1') lens clog-:11 in the face of 'may' and 'mightFVJ as,

'If gods mayo dy ~--‘ (I. ”79). '--1f kings may disgrace gods --'

(III. 152). '--if I might obtains ---’ (III. 350). '-—-1£ time might
aunswere my true meaning—-—' (II. ”7). 'I! I may(m1ght) go --} Here

the evidence from Lyly is fairly convincing. ~Lou6h less convincing

from current English. Such changes in meaning in aoocific verbs as

from (cumxan' {to know’) to ‘can' (‘to know'howy' $42;* 'to be ablo’))
from ’magan' (‘to ba ableS) to ’may' ('to be pormitted’). from ’oan'

(‘to be nble') to 'can' ('to be permitted') we are not primorlly concerned

with here.
A In Indgpendent Statements

The woߣ1 subjuhotive occurs in Ly]: in five categories: in statements
of wish. in statevents of octbotiality, in stotsrante of obligation. in

statomenta of eyhortation. and in statemonts of permission.

()6

1 In state outs of vish

E ones are tuOUfht of n) as c oabiz of fulfillmwut (that in. the
fulfillm at. being cret into tho futuro, in at 11 uoqaihlc) and b) as

unlikaTy or incapable of fulfillment.

a) Realizablo wishes include prayer: and improcationc boaido Vishnu
creper. The modal fortuia for prayers oni imprecationo is usually (may'
plus the infinitive of the verb. The iinflectionai ccnivalent is here
the formal present subjunctive. The citations here illustrate the common

uaare in the snooker's expracsian of prayer or i precation that the subject

-.J

of the verb (subjunctive) undergo some excericnce.

Ah! Qhera so are he be, safe may he be! (III. 2u6)

GOD acme tie Que—3.19 (ac—tyl) out of their ands. in whose hem-ts (long 1.33.;
the angina thus gouging) is not cngravea (III, #09)

L ZSrdos>tof our loads, and makers of our Lakes. long may zoo ling
lfifiis mnny nay you make (III. 11233)

in; mania and most happic yearos mo? bar grati us matestic continue,
to foucur and foster him, ana all others which co truly lone and honor
her (I. 1125)

flay thy henna choako such singing harloto (III, 201)

Divine Paniora. stay thy desperate hnnfl. ligg'sum era lightniagepurne
our Autume crap (III. 275)

his sweets voice. tirned to howling; and there sitteth he (long FQZJES
sorrow) wondring tnd weeping. and kissing the lawrell. his hate lone.
and mine one (I. h7a)

 

For wishes proper the modal formula may he 'would,’ rarely with
omitted subject, in centrsst to formal unage, clue 8n infinitive. The
Citations hots cypress desire or. as Dointed out by Cnicns in his

11)
.1scuesion of 'shnll on” will - should and wouli,’ willingness.

11' _ -.
L ) C.T.Cni~ns, 3n iovnoccd rqgliqh Cramnagj p. 135.

9?

I would heme hiu end is Incilln begin without Lyce. and not beyinne as
she ended without honeetie (I. 32?)

Ire. .ut th£t heat into to azay. Iis_-ic? “is. rethinx. till I see whether
all this be true that she heth snyd. half. .1 Ricio would fnine see
thee bog (III. 20b)

1 would not be in your coats for any thing (III. 122)

Zhese boyes be droonkLI 14yoold nct be in y or takings (III. 122)

Put first I would -ledl wheero thee shape an nunewere to that which I
Laue soyc‘. I. 252.

I would.haue her go to my house into the Countrie to ilect we conclude
tzia (111.175)

home for my wife: I would hang this kept from her. else she: I not be
able to keepe my house frog—Sroohe (III. 175)

In my oninion therefore. to peace aways these long nights. I would haue
some pantine that might be pleesaunt. but not Vnprofitable (II. 162-3)

Familla. thou art but a girl: Iflvould not bone a Weasel cryo (II. 397)

I would not heue thee thixk Ihileutus that lone is to be obtained by such
meanee. but onely by flith. vortue. and constancie (II. 118)

oreouer I wcuide hm_1e the neuorye of children continually to be exercised
(I. 2:787”

How in this send. I would discharge my mynde. / find cost from me. part
of my burd'nous cures (III. +98-99

I would hang tile my excuse that changeide is not in my Shinie (I. N89)

In the meane season. toout tlis Crone voul.d I hrue a H(it0h, and the first
lining thin: t.ut touchetfiandimion. to be taken (III. 63)

Hould you hone his loue. eyther by absence or eici.nes nelnked? (III. 30)

You would hnue no as I one duetie to you to leans Curio (I. 2M5)

for woemen b3 th<y neuer so £00113 4. no uld euer be t outh wine (11.69)

   

 

 

 

50m etinas the 'woulu' plus infinitive is followed by a noun clause.
In such inetenc coo 3.3 the following ’wish' expresses desire a cocond time.

In this instance also 'would' suggest: renetition in the peat.

I would wish that euerie thin: I touched mi ht turnc to cold: this is
the ainewee of warre. and the eweetneeee of peace (III. 117)

an indicative substitution occurs in the following.
Sxect anthia. how woulet t}; cu be pier.eed (III. 31)
b) Iii-ghee unlikulg or 11:17-02:3II‘IQ of fulflllm-‘llt-

It is difficult to define an unrealizable wish. Usually statements of

wish involve n preparatory independent verb (frequently omitted) and a

98
particularlisingidspendsnt verb; as. 'would (oh) that he night have oono.’

(The instances of wish in Lyly with 'hed' or 'were' in the dependent part
are listed as formal aubJunctivos.) The risk here is unrealistic in the
sense that the time for its fulfillment is past. But :1} classification of
the main verb as realizable or unrnhlieahle wouid depend on the particular-

-erefor not offering; can; inntmlces here. Of the

(D

.. .-

121ng details. ’ I am t
subJunctive function of 'would' there can be no Question. but there might
be of its equivalent‘l wish' and still more of’I uished.‘ Similarly the
pattern 'I mighficould. etc) high he had col-”Moors“: hare).' There in one

ooesible pattern however that excressea unrealistic wish.'I might(could.etc.)

have wished that—-.' but I have no inotences of it to offer from Lyly.
2 In statements of potentialigz

The model subjunctive of potentiality expresses likely or possible
notion or status that is conceived as having occurred. as occurring now.
or as occurring in the future in the course of events. do I explained in
the secéon on the potential subjunctive in independent statements in the
preceding chapter.. I am using the present category as an omnibut category.
It is necessary here too to distinguish between a) potentialities that are
realizable. that is realistic. assumptions or possibilities that é? yet
cone to pass. and b) potentialities that are unrealisable. or unrealistiee
possibilities that are either very remote or having been assumed for one
reasOn or another’slready pest rollizatton. In the case of modal potentialitv

I add a third category c) for 'cen‘ and 'could' statements.

a) The auxiliaries 'may' and ‘might.’ weakened from their earlier
meaning. have come to express simple contingency. the possibility of action
in the future. It should be remembered that they are now also used to

express permission and that they seem at times. more frequently in Lyly's

98
particularlising'dependent verb: as. ‘vould (oh) that he night here cone.‘

(The instances of wish in Lyly with 'had' or 'were’ in the degondent part
are listed as formal subjunctives.) Ine uish here is unrealistic in the

sense that the time for its fulfillment in past. But 22? classification of
the main verb as realizable or ufi’fih}§vah3£ won1d iapknd on the particular-
izing details."l am therefore not offering snag instances here. Of the
eubJunctive function of 'would' there can be no cuestion. but there might

be of its equivalent‘i wiah' una still more of’l uished.’ Similarly the
pattern 'I might(could, etc) wish he had ceme(wern here).' there is one
possible pattern however that enureseea unrealistic wish,'l might(could.etc.)

have wished that--.' but I have no inctnncee of it to offer from Lyly.
2 In statements of notentielifiz

The model subjunctive of potentiality expresses likely or possible
action or status that is conceived as having occurred. as occurring now.
or as occurring in the future in the course of events. is I explained in
the seofion on the potential subjunctive in independent statements in the
preceding chapter.. I am using the present category as an omnibut category.
It is necessary here too to distinguish between a) potentialities that are-
reelissble. that is realistic. assumptions or possibilities that a} yet
come to pass. and b) potentialities that are unresliseble. or unrealistiee
nossibilities that are either very remote or having been assumed for one
reason or another'elready pest roilizetton. In the case of modal potentiality

I add a third category c) for 'can‘ and 'oould' statements.

a) The auxiliaries 'may' and ‘might;' weakened from their earlier
meaning, have come to eXprees simple contingeney. the possibility of action
in the future. It should be remembered that they are now also used to

eXpress permission and that they seem at times. more frequently in Lyly's

99

time than at the present naturally. to eZpI‘OII something of their earlier

meaning.

How no: 31 Engines be restored? (III. 325)

Ceres mg; lose that that Cupid would save. true lovers (III. 327)

The subtill Fore egg well be beaten , but neuer broken from stealing his
PM (Is 191)

But as it is. it may be better) & were it bedder it is not the worst (1.325)

Genimedes maze cast an amiable oounteneunce. but that feedeth not (II. 71)

What me the meaning of these speeches‘bg, (III. 90) th

Even w this bodkin you may line unharmed / Your beawtye is i vertus
so well srned (I. 503)

Seeing thsrfore one ma 0 lane the clear Conduit water. though {he loath
the :uddie ditch (I. 2585

Unto y like sence may the answers of Socrates be saying (I. 210)

It mg; be when I was young as you. I was so idle es you (though in my
Opinion. there is none lesse idle than n lover) (II. us)

And now gentlemen. if you will give ears to the tale of Pidus. it maybe
some will be as watchfull es Phileuhus (II, hg)

“they that use to steels bonny, burns hemlooke to smoke the Bees from
their hives. and it naz‘be. that to get some odusuntage of as (I. h9)

'B-iight‘ has become a weaker and more hesitant ’nay,‘ perhaps already
in Lyly’s time. but it is difficult to say how for its original Issuing

had disappeared.

for were either of then wanting in you. it night tog! use to trouble.
and your selfe to shame (II, 109)

Ah ny Imilla how much an I bounds to thee. whiohs preferrest nine vn-
worthinsss before thy Fathers wrath, my happinesse before thins owns
misfortune. Iy love before thine owns lyfet How might I 13::ch thee
in courtesie. when no nortall creature on exceeds in constaneie? (I. 226)

Tis s lye; and yet if I had. he mi 1: 1:91 an inch or two (III. 156)

that nigt men do to be beleeuedt (II , is?)

So that. although you had as nanie louers as you hens fingers and toss.
zen night be one among them all. and ystt wholy suerie ones (I. 1+62)

9:21;. A famous sonne, but an infamous feet. £233. He might do it.
because he was a god (II. 336)

The kings night behold within the arbour. n fei’n'e Shepheerd (I. 507)

There sigh? I behold}. Drones. or Beetles, I knows not hows to terms then

111. 7 .
There might I see ingretitude with en hundred eyes. gasing for benefites.

end with a thousand teeth. gnawing on the bowelles wherein shes was
bred (III, 67)

100

r

Both 'should' and ’would' are very common in conclusions to realizable
conditions. They express contingent potentiality. There is not much
dffsrencs in their use with the different persons. certainly not enough to
Justify the traditional distinction in use. It is possible that 'would'

carried more of its earlier meaning; than 'should.’

histreese (qudd he) if you would buy all my thought at that price. I sh d
neuer be wearye of thinking (I..221#)

If that hartin could thatch up his church. this mans W

“Elder (III. hos)

I :nhould agggm my ten years absence s flctt banishment. were I not
honoured in her Maiesties service (I. li856)

Were it not my sonnes. that Nature worketh snore in me. then Iustice. I
should disherite the one of you (II. 23)

were I sicko. the var-ye sight of thy fairs face would drive no into a
sound sleeps (II 1200)

mess subtill shiftes these paynted practises (if I were to be wonne)
would soone weane ass (I. 221)

For if the butcher should take upon him to cut the Anatomy of a nan.
bicause he hath skil in opening an Ore. he would proue himself a Calfs
(I. 180)

Suffer so therefore to gaze on the Moons. at when. were it not for thy
selfe. I would die with wondering (III. 33)

Lost or forlorn. to so she was right deers / And this is certain. vnto
him that could I The place where she abides to us unfold: For euer
I would vow my selfe his / Eisner revolting till ly life did end (III. 373)

Your grapes would be but drie huskes (III. 21)

Yet among al the things that I committed. there is nothing so such
tormenteth my routed and ranth thoughts. as that in the prime of my
husbands youth I divorced him by my dtuillish arts; for which . if to
die might be amends. I would not live till tomorrows (III. 72)

Sometimes 'would' expresses in Lyly. as now. repetitive or habitual

actions

Every mning she wold put forth either some pretie question. or vtter
some nery conceit. to driue me from melancholy (II. {8)

Sometimes would he allure her with sweets nusicke. but harmony is harshLIflfl')

I an news enforced to remember thy mothers deaths. who I thinks was a
Prophstesee in hir lyfe. for oftentimes she would sen that thou baddest
more beautie then was conuenient for one—(WI. 2E3)

101
Indicative mbstitutione are of couree fairly common in Lyly.

Indeed if thou shouldeet rigge up and done in our ieokete. thou vaulting
be thought a very tomboy (III. 122)

Ho lie Philantue then maiet well QOIUOI Camilla with such druggee. but
neuer pol-evade her (II. 111)

b) The subjunctive of unrealietio nodal potentianwéccm. in 1.31:

a. now. in statements expressing a. possible action in the sense that it

ie felt to have been ooeeible once but is now for varying reasons merely
a hypothesis clearly past realization. It occurs principally in conclusion:
th°e conditions that are felt to be unrealistic or ‘eontrary to fact. and
involves Variouely the modal. 'ehouldfl 'vould.’ 'might‘ (always preterite
ferns) plan the perfect infinitive.

Had he not spoken I should have courted him (In. 263)

If Bogoe had nofbemied it. hove then should it have come to light? (111.71)
If Philentue had loved Lucille, he mulde neuer bane suffer-ed Eunhuee to

have see]: her (I. 210)

If fortune. a fidelitie had bin twinnee. the: migt have been as rich.
as faithfnll (I. “89)

The: sign. also have taker; example of the vine Mutation-n (I. 187)
It in a pretty boy and a. faire. hee niét well have beene a woman (II $39)
Had thy lute been lawrell. and the etringa of Daphne: haire. thy tunes
might have beene compared to my noatee (11!. 1’40)
There in one passage in Lyly with an indicative substitution (in-
volving 'need') in such unrealistic potentiality.
Farewel Diogenes. thou needeet not have scram“! reotee. if thou wouldeet
have followed Alexander T11. 35)
c) 'Can' and 'eonld' statements are extremely common in Lyly so they

are today, and there is little agreement in the grammariane‘ treatment of

then. In one place Curne liete\oa.n' as a potential subjunctive having a

102

12
stronger force than 'nsy.‘ ) but elsewhere he calls it indicative with
13)
potential force expressing ability to perform some not. Onions seems

to imply that it is indicative. “Can OXPrBBBBS shilitz. It has always

certainly these forms are not like other medals: they hen more of their
original meaning in tact and they are not regularly used as tense and
mood symbols. But since 'could' has by fair agreement subjunctive value.
I can see no reason for not considering 'csn' subjunctive too on occasion.

expressing trpossibility of ection through the ability to perform it.

'Could' is generally listed as a pest subjunctive referring to possible
action in the future. I quote Jespereen: “93313 is also used in main
sentences of reflected condition instead of the clumsy and overoenphatic
W (would) be able to: Lord. 1 could not endure s. husband sith n
heard on his face (813.). I had an early breakfast: new I could set a
little more. Then :16 conditional clause is found. this M is often
hardly more than a. weaker or diffident Variety of the present tense 39.3.
thus especially in questions: you won't be angry . will you! How could I?

Could you tell me the. right time?“ 1.5)

I shall arrange my materials from lyly under two headings: 1) those
instances which exemplify 'cgn' and ‘could' core or less in their earlier
leaning with present and past time distinctions: and 2) those instances

in which 'csn' and 'fiould.’ ignoring the elder tine distinctions and more

 

 

:2; G.0.Curne. Parts of Sneech and incidence. pp. 226-27.
1 ) G.0.Curme. Svntax. p. 1#09. '
15) C.T.°fl10nl. An .‘aidmcod Wish 813m; p. 1380

 

 

Otto Jespersen. Essentials of English Grammar. p. 2.57.

1h)

independnnt meaning. 1.0.. it is not used to form tones or mood equivalents.“

103

or less their earlier leaning. indicate possible. that is subjunctive.

notions of some sort.

1) 'Can' and 'could' statements orpressinn present and past tine dis-
tinctions ere perhaps weak indicatives. The clearest instances are those
in which the ability or power resides in the subject of the verb. But
when the ability or powers resides outside the subject. as frequently in
the ease of inanimate subjects.there is a somewhat different shade of

meaning conveyed.

I can scarce write for lay; and it is likely. this leeque cannot spggg
for wondeing (I. h86)

0f shat Grape this Wine is node I cannot tell. and therefore I lust crave
pardon (II. 51‘)

I can no more. I here tryed no lesse (II. 29)

i an amazed and can.no more. and your iudgnents shall require (I. 51h)

I cannot be so superstitous as these nice lovers (I. hSS)

A.thousand greates. fled shield sunswered this old.huddle. I can have
two servantes at that price (I. 269)

So? on. Tollus: I cannot imagine enie thing that can colour such a crueltis

111. 73)

sh Cassander. friend I can-not terns thee. seeing thee so unkinde (II. 17)

You can do lytte yf you cannot noister your words (I. RSI)

All this night I could not sleeve. dreaming of greens rushes (I. R91)

I could not finds one more noble in court. then your Boner (1‘. 7)

Eu fire in Home could Romulus staffe consume (III.h31)

Achilles spears could as well heals as hurts (1.2”?)

I Guild court it with the Italian. carous it with the Dutch-nan (II. 2“)

"cm‘ d 'Ion'as in the raging Seas be droundl (III. 1:30)

2) 'Csn' and 'could' in statements that do not imply the present and
past tile distinctions are to be considered subjunctives. They are then
like other models. 'Cnn' suggests subjunctive possibility and carries the
notion of a stronger 'nay.’ even though it can not always be replaced

idiomatically by 'may.‘ 'Could’ is sometimes replaceable by other model

preterites and as such to be regarded as a stronger 'would.' 'might.' etc»

101:

’9‘

As such it seems to ennhesise one of the several possibilities. As a model

it conveys e.greet veriety of shades of meaning.

And seeing we resemble (as you say)e each other in ouelities. it cannot be
that the one should differ from 7° other in curtesie (I. 198-99)

Good God can there hee any that hath the name of father which wyll esteeee
more the—fancie of his friends then the nurture of his son (I. 268)

And can¢you be so vnnaturall. whom dame Nature hath nourished and brought
vpp so many years. to repine as it were egaynst Eature (I. 191)

Indeed it hath bin stopt a long time. it can neuer rune as long as I
unite. upon this hris (1. ugh)

I! he be not returned. he cannot be long: we have also lost our pages
(III. 139)

that greater dishonour could hannq! to Diane. or to her Himnhes share. then
that there cen.be any time so idle. that ehold.enke their’heeds so
cddlel

Now. for that this gardener tsitteth me sith my vecstiou. I could prone
it a mystery not mechanical (I. kl?)

I could wish nyselfe like the inchaunted Castle of Lane. to hould you
hours for euer (I. h97)

Lfiaogldhbe even with my Mother: and so I will. if I shall call you mother

I . ~12)

 

Indicative substitutions can of course be made in the second person

singular.

And canst thou.lucilla be slight of lone in {creaking Phileutus to fine
to En hues? (I. 235)

I In stetehents of obléggtion

 

The model subjunctive of obligation occurs in Lyly e) in weakened

commands and b) in statements of moral or logical inference or preference .

a) The subjunctive of weakened cowmend. very frequent in Lyly. 1s
a 'let' - statement involving the first person singular or the third person
singuler'end plural. It should be kept in mind that not all 'Iet' -

clauses are of this nature: some are hortatory. and some ore permissive.

I.)

105

the distinctions are not always easy to keep clear. ”lbs overlapping.“

says Sonnenschein. ”of the signification: of the several moods and tenses.
like that of the cases. is due to the way in which human speech has been
deve10§ed all the world over. It was not made to order. so as to correspond
to preconceived categories of thought: it grew. And its growth was deter»
mined by practical human needs and natural associations of ideas. but
without regE§B.to logical consistency or completeness.“ 16) For n
discussion of the weakened command as related to the imperative see the

section on the subjunctive of obligation in the preceding chapter.

Letune have m: 1070 answered. and you shall finds as faithfnll (1. R88)
Peter. Thou coast remember these foure spirits? Raffe. Let me alone
to coniure th-m (:1.un3)
Whilst that the childe is young lette him bee instructed in vertue. and
lytersture (I. 267)
he aneweared. if Alexander wold feine see no. let him come to no. if
learns of me. lette him come to no (II. 3237
1 me via (quoth the fudge) tlaen 1 t h' m be t1 ed to tho halter. and let the
horse goo hone (III. 105)
letts_§ir forslov no occasion that may brings the childe to quietness.
and cleanelynesse (I. 266)
Alex. --~and I cannot tell how to tearme it. a curst yeelding modestie!
Hep. Let her passe (II. 341)
show “thy selfe sounds when thou.art rotten. latte thy hee be merrye. when
thy heart is mela.ncholy (1.255)
Tyterus. let yours be a boy and if you will: nine dhnll not (II. h70)
0 let SE2 tongue first seine Leercnus wound (III. 252)
eell then. let fayre wordegflgpqle that cholar (III, 200)
and let love by thy beames bee honoured in all the world (111. 328)
If all be conscience. let conscience hes the foundation of your building
(III. l‘09-»10)
well. let it rest ruperfect. & come you.vith me (11. 333)
Bel. replis not. for I all to Delphos: in the means time let it be
Erocleimed. that if there be any so cunning (III. 152)
Well said Camilla let it gge. I must impute it to my ill fortune (11,129)
fore if my curtesieé as you say. were ye case of your common. let it also be
‘ ye occasion of y ending your former discourse (I. 216)

 

 

16) E.A.Sonnenschein._§he Soul ofGrannar . Po 57-

106

e seeing them lg; them not scene to see them; & hearing them‘;gt them not
scene to heare (I. 282)
So;;_fight fanlte let them dieeenble as though they kneue them not (I. 282)
if by my folly any be allured to lust. let then bw'ny’repentnnnce‘bg
draune to continencis (1. 2h?)
Li?‘?§ii your eye-lids like the finance cleere set 91, 2h?)
lgt‘notyour minds be carried are: with vnyn delyghte (1. 28%)

b) The mofial euannctive of’norel and logical inference or preference
occurs. in Lyly as today. with a great many different auxiliaries. principally
‘Ibculd.’ 'would,’ 'might.' 'mflet,‘ 'muet neede.‘ 'ouéht.‘ The model is
followed by a simple infinitive. The obligation in such etetenente ie ’
frequently more implied than explicite. The notion of the verb is considered
obligatory because it is felt to be self-imposed according to some coco of
moral conduct. or because it is felt to be inpoeed by some external
necessity which there in little chance of wading. or because it ie felt to
express inescapably some preference on to procedure. or because it is felt
to specity the preper stages in some given procedure, or because it is felt
to precaribe details to meet certain etandarflo of Specifications. or because
it is felt to inaic»te conelueione inevitably involved in assumed prior
calculations. Lt tines theee models are roughly interchangeable. but by
reason of the many auxiliaries available there is here a wider range
in shade of meaning than was. or ie, at all possible with the formal
subjunctive. There is about most of these nodal usages an aura of generic
time, which is not strange. considering/the*notione they give expression
to. ?he staterente these modal: make are not predicated at any one point

in time. but are valid at any noesible point in time. for as long as time

or our system of thinking exists.

'Shonld' in need it such statements with all persons. Evidence. if

107

any were needed. 11' the inadequacy of the grammriane' rule about 'should'

and ’gould. ‘

€131? ehuld I {care hi: that unites on his neatefecte (III. 1401)

This is Eripeuc bazite. here she should be [note on page 560 explnine 'here
Inbiclee exvr-ecte here to bet] (III . 278)

line should be_*taxen es the Dead of Emt drinke water. by snatches (II. 56)

Faire faces should have emoothe hearts (III , 311)

A womsme hart and tcnrue by kinda gonad not be Relative: nlvaye (III. 1462)

30; again not looke 19.th cannot reach. nor long for y we shold not

—flhave (£1. ll)

You ekould think love like Homers Vite Holy. a white leafs a. e blafi roote.
a fairs wsheave. and a bitter taste (II, hfih)

Gods doe know. and gen abould. that love is a consulting of wit. and router-
ing of folly. e. staring blindneeee. and a blind gazing (III. 311)

He the d more over talke of many letters. not alwayee harp vpon one
string 1. 272) , .

the enill ende of Lucille should mane thee to begin a good lyfe (I. 312)

:3}! should come to be Ladies: and we in the country have an old saying.
that ’hnlfe a peace a day will serve a Lady' (I. ’492)

 

 

 

 

In two passages in the second person singular en indicative form has
replaced the subjunctive fora.
Thou shouldat not ween. that the bath runne feet. but that thou.heet
gone so glove 71. 311)

So shouldeet moufilm no then neyet dye. and then shalt thou dye to lyve
(I. 3959—) ‘

I have relatively few instances of 'wonld' from Lyly.

31de better become thee to be more courteous. and trans thy selfe to
please (11. 35h)
Lady. tg genie. 10%grennble to a, short snte. would segge superfluous
II. 3 7

I have only one instance of ’might,’ interchangeable apparently in

W
this case with '2Ebuld.’

And to be i_nne nb tl in e latter of great vaight. might be thought
ebenrd fill. 635

 

103

Statements with 'must' are very frequent indeed. 'kuot.' new curiously
changed in meaning from C3 'noete' (infinitive 'motan' . 'nay’),firet came

to be felt as expresaing a stronger toseibility than 'nay’ or 'night.’
17)

Now. as anions says. fiEEEE expresses necessitv and obli jation. '

Thus my message being ended: I rest. rzcet excellent Ladle. by the
Commenndement of my nietrie. the Cueene of the Fayeries. returne to
my charge (1.1455)

being not able in person to peye with the launce this rent of my eorniee.
I ruet beeeeohe eonme noble or woerthio gentelman (Z I 113-4130

If thon.be wedded to that wickedness. I must and will :33 it punished to
the utternoet (III. 78)

Behold Ascenio. for thy only sake. / These tedious treuels I Wnust under.
take (III. 3M9)

0 Italy I rust love thee. because I use borne in thee (II, 88)

Though my Weonldiere be valiant. I must not therfore thinke ny quarrels
iuet (II. 160)

Rieio. honor no. kneele downe to nee. kiee fly feet. I must make thee blessed
(III. 133)

I must eeerdh every place for him. for I stand en.thernes till I heere
whet he; Math done (III. 188)

Pov- must enerie one by witm nke an excuse. end euerio exeuee unet bee
cooenngefi(III. 192)

Aristotle mngt ding_uhen it pleeeOth Philip (I. 315)

:EE meet consider that all our lyfe ie devided into remission and study
(I. 277)

For whatsoeuer he uninteth it ie for his vlonsure, and wee must think
for our nrofit. for hopellee had his reward though he new not the
vorke (II. hz)

Endinion..xgu.euet none tell who Bumenidea shrineth for his Saint (111.17)

Enquire at Crdinariee. there ggft be salletg for the Italians (III. 115)

They mnet now be taunted with sharp rebukes. etrnight vnye admonished with
fairs wordé”fi. 271)

Thou art barbroue not valiant. Gods must be entreeted. not commanded
(III. 158)

Our exercises must be as your indgnent ieJreeembling water. which in
aleniee of the same colour into what it runneth (II. 359)

 

 

The model 'muet needa' was very frequent in Lyly. 'Neede' ie an

adverbial néjungt. from the OE genitive 'nefldes' . 'by necessity.’ nov

 

17) c.1031”... in Advanced Inglifl Svn‘ tax. p. 139.

109

no longer felt to be necessary. It wae no doubt other-wine formerly.
foutenn point: out that the purpose of eueh ndverbial adjunct: van either
to expreee ehadee of’neaning beyond the power of the verb or to emphaeize

or add preoieion and that they were neuer need with the inflectionnl

subjunctive.”I It in not difficult to eee that 'lnet' needed. while its

meaning use in traneition. a particle like 'nedee’ to etrengthen the notion
of etrong-poeeihility or contingeney. The very frequent occurrence of
'mnet neede' in Lyly'night carry the implication that 'muet' alone had

not yet «runny attained its preeent meaning.

I must needes conelude with Philentne. though I should canill with Ennhnee
III. ISO)

It was a verie good.horee. I must needs confeee (111.21h)

I will knove of the old women whether I be e.nnide or no. and then. if
I be not. I must needes be a man (111,191)

I must needs beleeve there are gode: for I think thee an eninie to the.

II. 350

I must needs 1” ld.uhen neither reneon nor oouneell onn.he heard (II. 331)

I have hearde that women eyther love entirely or hate deadly; and seeing
you have put me out of doubt of the one, I must needee Ere evade my
selfe of the other (I. 238)

if thou.2ave revealed the truth. he Inn 1 e thee vneonetent
(I. 20 )

let good lady. let me obtain one anal ante. which deregating nothing from
your true love, 29:} needee be lawful (II. 785

He nngt neede goe that the deuill driven (III. 189)

'Eeed“hne come to function en en auxiliary as well an a full verb.
I have only one passage from Lyly with 'need' as an auxiliary. and that
curiously en indicative torn. Its current meaning of obligation or
oomnnleionldeveloped‘pertly no doubt fron.the frequent nee of the perellel

torn 'needs' with 'muet.‘ In the present massage it carries implications

oftnnreality.

 

15) H. Pontemn, Mood and Tenet of the English VOfb- P- h.

110

Ihou.needeet not have scraped rootes. if thou wouldeethhave followed
—wAlexander (II. 35)

'Ought' likewise is e.very frequent modal in Lyly. 0f ’ought' and
'should' Jeepereen says that they ' have come to he a stronger and a
weaker expreseion of present duty: 23535 is historically the preterite of

2:: and thus meant 'had to' (would have to). but the conditional

meaning ie no longer felt.“ 19)

by .0 Inch the more (Sayde Cyrus) I ought to aheteigg from his sight (1.250)

The consent_ of so many ages. of so sundrye nations. and of so divers
linden. in embracing the Scriptures. and the rare godlynesse of some.
22£EE_t° establiih the authoritie thereoff amongst vs (I. 298)

£55 alwuy ought to bee e myrror for youth. for where olde age is impudent
there certainly youth must needs be shamelesee (I. 283)

In hattaylee there ought to he a dyuhtfull fight. and a deeperat ende (I. 211)

d the higher thy calling is. the better ggfigtthfy conscience to bee (I 307)

So ought we Eunhues to frame our selves in all our actions & deuises (II. ha)

Beeides this. where the Holy Ghost hath ceased to sette downs. there ought
we to cease to enquire (I. 299)

we—ought to take greater‘heede that we be not intrnpped in follye.then
feare to bee subdued'by force (II. 1h)

You.o§fiht therefore no more to be ngrieued with that which I have eayde

I. 259)

Vice parentes ought to take good heede . especially at this time. yt they

frame their sonnee to modesty (I. 280-81)

There is one passage with an indicative fore in the second person.‘

singular.

By'how'much the more thon.e1celleet others in honors. by so nuche the
more thou.oughteet to exceed then in honestie (I. 307)

 

19) Otto Jogger-sen. Essentials of English Grammar. p- 258-

111

h In statement; cf exhortation

The subjunctive of exhortntion occurs largely with the first person
plural. It is very doubtful whether parallel patterns with other persons.
singular or plural. should be so classified. The model auxiliary is
'let.' which with en infinitive is exactly equivalent to the formal in-
flectioncl present subjunctive. although it should be kept in mind that
statements with 'letc’: ”press other notions than exhortation. This model

hortntory is very frequent in Lyly.

It should be tent in mind that statements with ‘let' express other
notions besides exhortetion. Hany grammarinns consider any 'let' state-
cent on inperetive. and thereby recognise a first and third person
imperative. as 'let us eing.’ 'let the. telk.‘ ht Reed and Kellog
point out that '33 is not the subject of the verb-phrase let-sing and 3:35
is not of the first person.“ that '2! is the object complement of let.
and the infinitive 3335 is the objective complement. having 33 for its
ensued mbject.‘ 29) mile I an unable to consider ell'let‘oclsueee
us of one kind. I feel the argument advanced by Reed and Kellogg much too
spacious. based as it is on more verbel patterns. I shall consider 'let'-
clauses of these different kinds. 'Let us sing' is hortetory: 'let
them tnlk' is permissive: and ‘let this be a lesson to you' is imperative
or weakened cannand in nodal form. Guns too I nay ndd. considers 'let'
with an infinitive as the modern (that is. nodal) subjunctive means of

expressing volitive (that is. imperative) notion.21)

 

:10; Alonso Reed and Breinerd Kellogg Ii er Lesson in E 11.11, p, 329.30“.
G.O.Curne. College English Grammar. p. 2 1.

J

112

The Scorpion that stung thee shall heals thee. n sharps sore hath a short
cure. let vs age (I. 215)

Now let vs vse no cusions.but fairs hearts (I. h37)

Let vs not now stand wishing. but presently seeks than out. (III. 320)

Rania. This is the Temple of our great god. let vs offer our sacrifice

(III. 31?)

3033. So. no more Ladies: let our conning to sport not tourne to
epight (III. 138

The hortatory subjunctive occurs very frequently in elliptical state-

ments: usually a verb of notion is to be understood.

Manesa Hell then. let ve to the matter (II. 335)
Fhao. Yet old ynough to talhe with market folkes. hiletn. tell‘lgt
. vs in (II. ROI)
Riiet. For snie good. I thinks. Serena: yet to satisfie thy ninde we
will see what she can saie. Ser. good brother let vs (III. 195)
Egg. Tush! theyr turns shall bee next. all must bee done orderly: late
to it. for nowe it workes (III. 205)

"Pris. hilt thou gee soone to Memphios house? §Qg. I. and if you.will.
let I! (III. 208)

It is vnpoesible let vs with speed to the king to know his resolution
(III. 150)

5 In statements of'pernissiog

The subjunctive of permission occurs very frequently in Lyly. The
usual modal auxiliary is 'nay' or 'night.’ though.in.lqu"nay' scene to
be for more common than 'night.' though other models also occur. such as
'let' and even.'uust.' 'Hight' has some to denote a weakened. sore
hesitw 'mu.‘ Sweet points out that ’nay' implies possibility with an
infinite future.22) as of course it does. though not always per-lesion. He
also differentiates "might' and 'should': "should’ expresses the idea of

a result as in itself inevitable or probable. while 'might' suggests the

22
) Henry Sweet. A New English Grammar. Part II. pp. 115.117.

113

- 23) .m o o I 0
result only as a possibility. then may and might express more

possibility. they are treated under the potehtial subjunctive.

And please ye. you n51 5a.] And leave no here to feed upon my woe (111.363)
I must stay forsaken and desolate. You nay_gg with naieetie. Joy. and
glory (1. 1‘9‘!)

It is your owns. and onlie you may wears it (I. R57)
It be e d Philantus. but I were then verys vnfit for such.pastinss
72111. 157)‘ i"

In questions. very commonly. 'may’ or 'might' introduces a polite

request.

Mg; we know the res for our better skyll in sorrel (III. 28)

A strange humour. Eight I enouigg the cause? (III. h?)
hey it therefore Eleaee yon.to hear of his wife who lynee by your (I. h69)

Sometimes. as today. the question order is in meaning not materially

different from the declarative order.

And so good father m I so of thy cotage. which thou seeneet to account
of so homly (II. 39;

At times there is a suggestion of the earlier meaning of ‘nay' ('to

be able'). It is of course difficult to be certain. since it is entirely

Ia matter of feeling. In the second of the following passages there is

also a suggestion of prohibition.

this Ditty n be to the high 'siiemaigne’aeasuro' (111. h53)o

Alas good Sir. the cause may not be knowne / That hath inforste me to
be here alone (III. 3L9) we

I 131 not speaks of love. for I have vowd here to sollicit her (III. 262-63)

 

 

23) Ibid.. pp. 115-117.

11h

Permission is frequently also expressed in 'let' statement. But it
should be remembered that not all 'let’ clauses eXpress permission; they

may also indicate exhortstion or weakened command in modal fern.

‘Yet good layd. let me obtain one smal sute. which derogating nothing from
your true lone. must needes be lawful (11.78)

Let them curse all day. so I may have but one kiss at night (III. 327)

I nariefi(ouoth the lodge) then let him be tied to the halter. and let
the horse_gp hone (III. L05)

let my father vse what speeches he lyst. twill follow nine own lust (I. 207)

Ah anhues. let not my credul ties be an occasion.heereafter for thee to
practice the lyke crueltie (1.233)

-nen let her stand or move or walhe alone (III. 2h“)

I take a surfit without recurs: let her her accustomed coynese
(III. hg)

Let lentune hens his right if you will hone your cuiet (II. M56)

0 no Gunoohilus. there let her slegge And let vs pray that she may be
recured (III. 285)

W
There is onlyxexample of 'nust' in the sense of permitting or

recognising freedon or liberty.

Tellus. Cynthia must command what she will (III. 77)

115

B In Demandent Statements

 

Th9 nodal subjunctive in deoerdont statctentc occurs in Lyly in

'9

five c:.t.93rries: in $‘IFI.’.‘€‘XZ‘PYlt? Cf 3"?)‘1, in totem—n+9 of Trotnntinlity,
in statorrntr of obligation. in statrrrnte of condition. rnd in state-

rette of concesaiou.

1 In statements of High

 

Wishes can be thought of a) as realizable or ooesihle of fulfillment
(that is. there is some chsnco. oinczthoy are cast into the future. that
tiey may be fulfilled) and b) as unrealizable or imoossible of fulfillment.

The former. if may he stated. for outnumber the latter.

a) 3,alizahle wishes occur. in the form of orayers or viehes preper.
after certain verbs. and the gradations frfm prayors to wishes are more
a matter of shadinga than of sharp demarketions. Generally the main verb
is preparatory. and the douanflent statement gives the particulars as well

as tho shadingr.

Prayers in dependent statements use 'may' plus an infinitive. occasionally

"should“ plus an infinitivelto exoreee a different ehade of meaning.

Fy leige god grant thy time way have no end (III. h9h-95)
God graunt the_gpr1de maie ends with your life (1. 32%)
and seeing I shall hardly be induced euer to match with any. I beseeche
you. if by your Fatherly love I shall be compelled. that I may match
with such a one as both I may love. and you may like(I,.‘2 27}

I began thus to pray. that as she hath lived fortie yearen a virgin in
great maieetie. so she may lyre foureecore yearee a mother with great
ioye. that as with hir we have—long time hadde peace and plentie. so
by hir we way ever have quietnesee and aboundance (II. 212)

116

0 no Gunoohilus; there let her sleepe. ind let vs pray that she may be-
LEM (m. 285) .._...._.....

hell I an revenged at last of my haicter; I pray ‘od I reg be thus even
with all mine enemyes (III. 278)

To eignifie that my hart is there. I most humbly entreat. that 3h1’.§2!
rag be urceerted (I. 387) .

God shield you should have cnnse to be so cunning as Apelles (II . 339-h0)

 

Prayers innerceptibly shade into wishes preper dewending on the char-
acter of the main verb that in used. 'Vish' and 'would' are of course the
most obvious. but other main verbs occur as well. 'Vould' will be
considered by itself; here I list citations with other main verbs. In
all inatnncee the main verb is frernrntcry. Sometimes a verbal noun
taxes the rince of a finite verb. 'izy' is root frecuent in the clause
of rnrticulorizat-cn after a main ve“b in the present. though soretinee
'ehould‘ occurs with a different shading! After a main verb in the past.
'uould' and 'nicht.' separontly interchangeably. occur in the deoendent

statement. Frecnently such wiih statements shade into recuests.

The knightcwisheth it may be a watch (better than Scarborowa warning)
to the Noble Gentlemen of your Courte (I. h55) - ‘.
I-fhat'ognr9m present. we wish it mag be t‘io‘gé’lt the dawning of Agrijopa
hie ehadowes (II. 316)a
I trust I may say that his feet shold have ben. olde gelena (II. 7)
Where your hajestie hath don audiraclc. & it can not be denied. and I
have Wt (mirth) (I. 3:68 .
This is their resolution. and my desire. that their lives may be inployed
wholy in your service (I, £85) *
Va follow. deeiring that our_thoughtee may be touched with thy finger (III. 119)
Fever asking what she did. but alwayea prnying she n " do well. not
enquiring whether she might do that she would (II. fig)
for when they see a sharpe witte in their sonne to conceive. for the desire
they have that hee shoulde out runne his_fellowes. they loaden him with
continuall exercise (I. 277)
therein he vsed.euch cunning. that Appelles himselfe seeing this worke.
wished y‘ Venus would turne hir face (II. 211)

 

"L'ould' is in current English almost emudively nn auxiliary in dependent

117

etatmnents. But in the following passage: from Lyly it is possible we have
to do with 'would' 33 a finite verb. In that case these passage: belong
more pragarly under the formal subjunctive. If we interpret these state-

ments an elliptical. 'wculd' must be regarded as an auxiliary.

fever asking wrct s’e did. bfi. rl~m:'3e nrzy*nz aha mav do wéll, not
enquiring thether she m ght do that eie would (II. hé)
lor this hi] mttm the It I. thn t eyther I did not hit the urination which
she 35.31.31 (11.63)
Cnely some delyght I toohe in the hethcmatficks which made me knovcn of
more than I wou.!d (II. 119~20)
s that. flzeraz‘er m*~t be tainted of none but knellce. nor engraven
.1y but lininpus. nor our Elizabeth set forth of every one that would
3t {(II. 38)

‘20

c...—

3:66
of a:
in In

The elbjunctivc of nurticulsra after 'vould' is so frequent that I
shall cantcnt myself with a few illustrative pagtages. '00uld.’ 'wnuli.‘

'Light' are the medals in the dhpcndent clause. all more or less

interchangeable. aluays followed by the infinitive.

And I would gentlemen yt zou cauld feel the like improeeione in your
myndes at the rohercnll of my m- ’shcype (II. 51)

Friend F’dus (if For une allow a taerm ec familiar) I would I might
live to ace thee as wise (II. 50)

I would the ggdn would remoue +hie punishment. eo that hydae would be
penitent (111.126)

I hOL.ld Im It conpcl; thcc as a Fathnr (I. 306)

xfter 'lu ;.d as liefe. ' 'hed rather.’ etc.. the modal ’should‘ occurs
in the ’3 e3 ndent atct3rl rt of )articulnre. In the second passage the
'hnd' is elliptically omittnd.
I had as liefe an other shold take measure by his back. of my anuarel.
as avnoint what wife I hhrll have. by his minde(II. 219)

If it come by commaundement of Ceres. not their owne notions. I rafiher
they should hat; (111. 327)

118

Ellintical atatamenfa of wish are very common. Ona type f ellipsis

is the omisaion of the m&1n verb.

9“. tflgt I 0 1i 3: Lue with yen, .s LQLEF clrcuusuLucee can.lfime can
:06 with you. : rscns can goe with ycu; they can mova like Heaven; tut
I l’kfl dull 3 th (L3 I a£1b13:3(3(d), mu:t Etha& vnroable (I, :97)

Ah tha t I mi~32t once av? “13.535 Endimion! (III, 52)

’t

C QVLt l Ldora would reggrd my SdiiG 1 (ILI. 21:)

Exclaimationa c£.n be elliptically parall 91 in aatterns, though they

are not themselves 31?

that a :oan s .oulé deLeLLle 80. '(III. 285}
\ v- , ‘.
't as fayrs a 1LZb9 sstlfi b1: dCVLgrcd (Iii, Bib)

In all ty,ea oi wishes indicati. ve substituticns are cosnon in thn

s 6 so 11 (1 p6 1‘ 3 on s i. :‘.,j-;‘c.lar .

I will pray that thLu uayst b» maasured vqtg with the lyke measure (I. 235)
But god 8‘ ield.a Incilla that tbmu_§hoglflggt be so carelesse of thine
haven: as to corrit the state tIQFaoff to a stranger (1.221)
I woulde not Iu hues that than d1ou1dest condemns me of rigour. in that
I seeks to 8.39w&"3 thy follye by reason (I. 22») .
I t4ll t1ee, I haL' rather than shouldest rob my cheat. than imbpsell
my scuue (III. 221
I ha-' rather LWIu shouIdPst walks amonge the beddes of volsome potm ii
hearoes. then the knottes of pleaaaunt flowers(II. 81-2)

 

 

cajthe nodal subjunctive occurs in unreahistic wishes in dependent :tata-

ments. The pattern is 'might' or 'could‘ or ‘shOuld' orl‘wish'(or‘wished‘)._

 

 

I have only one instance from Iyly/ involving 'might,‘ but the other
medals are tossibleI 'but to have made it ful. I wished I mivht have
seems it' (I, ESE). The SLme pattern occurs in elliptical statements of

wish, with the main verb om’tted. as. 'oh. that he might have been here.’

 

’oh. that I might hr Ye sePn it. CLere is no question here of the unreality

ll)

of the wish or of the subjunctive character of the dzwendoqt’verb which

ezyresses the unreoli y.

H. 1,21. a .1 L-,...."4-
1. I11 31.11,»? “1113 of ‘01 111-441.1111“

 

¢he subjunctive of totentiality expresses likely or possible action
or status that is concwived as having occured. as occurring now. or as
ocurrinr in flhe future in the course of events. The disfinctions should
be kpyt in m5nl h€ro, as in tho case of independant statomants. botwnon
realizable and unrealizable potentiality. But ainoe moat inatnnces of

unrealiznble Tofienti.11t"

occur in coni't’fins. 1rd csvdfit’onal statonants
arfi 51V9n afi seper;to c togory elsewhere. :56 distinction need not here

be enfiPrad in the classif1CLtion.

a) $32 subjunctive of gotentiality with_the nodal auxiliariea (as
with the forral subjunctive) occurs in noun clauses as objects aftor such
verbs as 'suppose.' 'suspect.' 'fear,‘ 'think,’ €know,‘ '1msgine,‘ etc..
or in noun clauses after corresyonding verbal nouns. As in t‘c case of the
formal subjunctive, these verbs or“ used mosfi frequentlj wit; the first
yfirwon. They serve to ntensify the uncertai fly of the sunoosition,
doubt, etc. In Lyly'these module may be replaced by the formal subjunctive.

The yreterite of the modols 13 used after a-present tense.

L modal auxiliary ('s‘cnld,’ 'would') plus an infinitive occurs aftcr

a main verb in the present.

Suwvose Vulcan 2*oulfl so terner thy sword, . that ware thy heart neuer
so volFmt T131. 1230

So I suspecting that Eu hues would be curved of some curiona Reader. thought
by sore false above to bringe them in hepe (II. h)

'0 woonon 1f thqy knewe what excellency were in than. I fears nee ES!

120

should.neuer winne then to their wills. or venue then from their ninde
I. 217

Lucille seeing him in this pitifull plight and tearing he would take
stands if the lure were not cast out (I. 22h)

and they seeing one another. noting the apparell. and marking the person-
ages. he should call in his sonne for fear he should over-resch his
speech (III. 197)

I an sory to thincke it should he so. and I sigh in that it cannot be
otherwise (1.321)

do you not thinks it would beate my heart blacks and blew? (III. 330)

What do yo2.thinke Ile bee cosned of my (other! no thinkes I should not!
(111.22 )

rersrdo entered. shone they all duetifully vslczmed.hone. who rounding
Phileutus in fihe ears. desired.hyn to accompany him innediaiely without
further pausinge. protesting it shoulde bee as well for his profernent
as for his owns profits (I. 2175

If thou.vouldst but permit no to talks with thee. or ty writing suffer
no at large to disc01rse wt thee. I doubt not but: . both the onus.
of g; lone wold be beleeusd1 & the extra-itie rewarded (II. 12k)

and if you he angrye biceuse I an pleased. oertes I deems zgu.wouldem
content if I were deceased (I. 2M5)

1‘ time a fortune could not wears oui. whet Gods and neeure had wrought
vppo: not once imagining that white and read should return. to blunt
and yellow (II. 381-2) ,

.A nodal anxiliar7('mighi') plus en.infinitive occurs after a main
verb in the preterit. without much change in meaning.

I did long time debate with Iy'sslfe Phileutus. whether it night stand
with nine honor to send thee on ennsvere-o-(II. 127)

A.nodal auxiliary ('night.‘ 'sould') plus a perfect infinitive occurs
after e main verb in fihe present'to express e supposition referring to the
nest.

Cell hither Campaspe. He thinks I night have bin.nade priuie to your
effeeiion (II. 356)

Pignelion neketh against this. for Uenus seeing him so earnestly to lone.
& so effectually to prey. grennted.hin his request. which had he not
h: importunate suit obtained. I doubt not but he would rather haue
honed.hir in peeces then honoured hir v passions II. 1

A nodal auxiliary('vould’) plus a perfect infinitive occurs after a

main verb in the preterito referring to e supposition in the past.

121

Having received long life by Phoebus. & rare bewtie by nature. I thought
all the yeere woulde have beene May, that fresh colours would alwaies
continue (11. 381-827—

I was glad to take gyro. for the nettle came so fast. that I feared my
face gould have beans turned to silver (II. nun)

A.nodal auxiliary ('should‘) plus a perfect infinitive occurs after
a main verb in the past perfecs without much actual change in meaning.
There is a certain degree of unreality implied in this and the preceding

citations.

I had thought that my hoary hadron should have found comforts by thy golden
lockes (I. 3M3)

b) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbial clauses
expressing indeterminate time in the future after such particles as

'till.’ ’until.’ 'before.‘ ‘ere.’ etc.

I went nothing.‘3ill she would needs crqggghne (III. 3h-35)

Here I was writing Finis and Funis. and deteruined to lay it by. till
I might see more knnuerie filde in (III. th)

THis Letter dispatched. Euphues gaue hisselfe to solitarinesse. deter-
mining to sciourne in some vncauth place. vntil time night turns
white salt into fine sugar (I. 228)

The other hedde nothing to commend hi. but a quiche witte. --which
wrought such delight in this Ladye. who was no besse wittie then hee.
that you woulde have thougit a marriage to be solempnised before fig
the latch could be talked of (II. 70)

I warrant it would be a good while ears she would scratch him out of his
graue with her nayles (III. 265-66)

Bee not.coy when you are courted. Fortunes wings are ends of times
feathsrs. which stay not whilgst one may neasure the. (II. 383)

Le watermen which on the Tomes do row / Locke to the Fast. but West keepes
en the way. I My Soueraigne sweet. her countenance setled so. / To
feed my hope while she her snares ni§h§_lgyg (III. M72—73)

c) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbial clauses express-
ing-purpose after such particles as 'so that.’ ‘so' (with ‘that' undere-

stood). 'that' ( with 'so' omitted). 'that' (omitted but understood). 'lest.‘

 

p1...-

122

I woulde the Gods would remoue this punishment so that fiydas would be
nonitvent (III. 126)

Things easie to be hadde. and connonlye practised. so that I woulde not
haue thee stands in doubts of thy loue (II. 116)

to no Eunhues thou onely hast wonno no by loue. and shalt only wears me
by law. I force not Philautus his fury. so I may haue Euphues his
friendship (I. 225)

I. and if you will. let vs; that we mayfggg how the young couple bride
it. and so we say teach our owns (III. 208)

and in this I will endeavour both my wit and my good will. so that
‘ggthéng.shall want in use. that may work ease in than (II. 15

I would he would geue me a good boss on the sure. that I Eight haue
a golden cheeks (III.123)

How happie shal we be if hes woulde but stroke our heads. that we mi :ht
haue golden haires (III. 123)

The Lficedenonians were wont to shows their children dronken men and other
wicked men. that by seeinge their filth they might shunng the lyke
faults (I. 168)

The wolf desirous to search in the Lyons denne. that he might espye some
fault. or steals some prays. entered boldly. whome the Lyon caught in
his paves and asked what he would? (II. b3)

Hey he i would I were s witch. that I might be a Dutchesse (III. 1511)
Yonder I espie .ndimion. I will seems to suspect nothing. but sooth him.
that seeing I cannot obtains the depth of his lone. I may lam sths

height of his dissembling (III. 32)

and seeing his Camilla to be courted with so gallant a youth. departed:
yet with-in a corner. to the ends he might decipher the Gentleonan
when he found to be one of the brauest youthes in all anland. called
i'urlus (II. 106.?)

And yet woulde I not haue thy wife so curious to please thee. yt fearing
least hir husband shold thinks she painted.h‘r face. she s old not
therefore wash it (II. 225-26)

And in this poynt I means not to be nyne owns earner. least I should scene
eyther to picks a thanks with men. or a quarrel with women (I. 203‘

Lady. I forgot to commend you first. and leaste I shoulde haue overslipoed
to praise you at all. you haue brought in my bewtie (IijLOD)

Friend Euphues (for so your talks warranteth no to tease you) I dare
neither vse a long processe. 'neither louing speech. least vnwittingly
I s'romdguse you to convince me of those thenges. w‘ich you haue
alredy condemned (I. 198)

I haue aunswered your customs. least you shoul.d arggg me of coynes (. I. 106)

Le: me do :y busines. I my self am afraid. least my wit slould was warm

11 335

olde men are seldome merry before children. least their laughter night
Eggggg in them loosenesee (II. 225)

Thy wanton glaunces. thy scalding sighes. thy louing signes. caused me
to blush for shame. and to looks wanne for feare. least they'ehould be
perceiued of any (I. 221)

The Gods dally with non. kings are no more: they disgrace kings. lest
they shuld be thug;ht gods (III. 151)

Repeat our bargain. ere we sing our Songv/ Least after wrangling. should
our mistreese wron (III. 376)

 

t.)
“.3
Kid

d) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbial clauses

orpressing limitation after such particles as 'unless.'

And to conclude with you Surius. vnlesss I might hang such a one. I had
as leans be buried as Buried (II. 163-69)

thy seyest than that? thou.hast left a print deeper in thy hand alreadis
than a halfpenis canne leans. vnles it should sing worse than an hot
yron (III. 187)

For my selfe. as I knows honest lens to bee a thing inseparable from our
sex. so doc I thinks it most allowable in the Court: volesse we would
haue all our thoughts made of Church - works (III. 138)

e) The subjunctive of potentiality occurs in adverbial clauses
(sometimes in noun clauses) expressing indefinite action after such relative
particles are 'what.‘ ‘whers.’ 'where-in.‘ 'whersby.’ ’w‘ereof.’ 'whsre-

with."fron whence) 'when' (2 whenever). etc.

and that all night follow'ly future lyfs. I means bears to shows what
fathers should doc (I. 2&1)

all thine attire misshapen to make thee a monster. and all thy time
mispent to shows thee vnhappy. what should I god about to decipher
thy life. seeings the beginning shswsth the ends to bee naught (I. 307-8)

But I commit my cause to the consciences of those. that either know
what I am. or can.gesss ghat I shold be (I. 325-26)

As yet wg cannot tell whatwwe should tearme our labours. yron or ballyon
(II. 3 0)

thich event booing so straunge. I had rather leans then in a.nuse what it
should bee then in a mass in telling what it was (I. 2R5)

Beside this there bee many fathers so inflamed with the lane of wealth.
that they bee as it were incensed with hats againste their children:
whic Aristippus. sesinge in an olde niser. did partly note it. this olde
miser askinge of Aristippus what hee would take to teach and brings vp
nys sonns -- (I. 269)

then one of the Sparthans cryed out: Verily y. Athenians know what should
be done. but they neuer doe it (I. 275)

And in my minds. though simple be the comparison. yet seemely it is.
that your anger is lyke the wrangling of children. who when they cannot
get what they would hang by plays. they fall to crying (II. 66-67)

Euerie one seeming to be that which they are not. ensly do practise what
they should not (I. 1426)

Pithuaoras and Giptes. you.shall yet remains in my Courts. till I hears
what may be done in this matter (III. 6})

Otherwise. I cannot see. wher I nighttginde succour in any noble personage

(II. 7)

12h

For often-times neue I found much water in my ddedes. but not one dron
of such wine. & the ground where ealte ehouldfigrow,but neuer one corne
that had savour (II.lh5)

and weighing with himselfe. that often in nnriugee. ther haue fallen
out braules. wher the dziefost loue should be (II. 152)

that greater vertue can there be in e Brinoe then mercy. what greater
preiee then to abate the edge whidh the should whette. to pardon where
she should punish. to rewarde uhere she should reuengs (11. 207) ‘

Yeelde Phaod but yeeld to me Pheo: I entreete where I my command (II. 1#01!)

and Ile sing Patria vbicunque bene; euerif'houee is my home. where I no!
etench hunger (III. 200) ~

Parrhaeiue eunewered him. let it be lawful for Parrheeius. 0 Alexander.
to shew a Table wherin he would paint glexender (II. 2L¥)

we'vresent no conceitee nor warree. but deceitee and louee. wherein the
trueth may excuse the plaineneeee (II. 372)

The name of a Prince in like the eweete {deaw. which felleth as well
vuon lowe ehrubbee. es hygh trees. and resenbleth a true glaoee.
‘lggreoin the roore maye Egg theyr faces with the rych. or a cleare
etreame‘ggggggin_nll mega drincke that are drye: not they onelye that
are wealthy (II. 39)

Tflie iehtge any thereingyou must satin-fie Feptune and some your eeluee
(II. 5 ) w

In this place is no choice of nnie thing, whereb; I might eignifie my
dutifull affection (I. MES)

Although there be no force. which may compel me to take anye. Ineither
a prefer. where-bl I might chuee all (II. 72)

yet there will appeare a near by y” which one an: gesee‘ the minde hath
bone pierced. and a blemish gfierebz one edge indge the heerte hathe
bene etayned (I. 28%)

the course of the Sunne. the order of the serves. the beautifulnesse of
the Element. the sight whereof might sufficiently induce V: to beleeue
they proceed not by chnunce (I. 293)

end nenie other thinges Eadnne. the repeticion whereof qu‘at your better
leyeure seeme more pleasing (III. 67)

The sum of all wherenith I would heue my Ephoebus endued (I. 283)

I neuer before that tyne could imagin whet loue should meane. but reed
the tenrm as a flout to others. wLich I found new as a feuer in my
selfe. neither knowing from whence the occasion should arise..nor
ghere I might seeke the remedy (II, 52)

As oft we see before a sudden showre. / The senne shines hotteet & hath
greatest potre: / Euen so when fortune meaneth to deride. / She liftee
a loft. from whence he soone may slide (III. N98)

 

Occasionally Lyly uses indicative forms in place of the subjunctive

in such etatenente.

, eve-e

,J
1'- .L‘
\‘1

Oftentimee I haue beene in thy c}..n iy, there easily t‘eu rightett h”¥3
xe~ne'“n” ear wy~ne c}.eekes IT. 1 ‘
3.19;:7n‘r‘. 3; #:2221278 to the lives v}. ew- aby
olfe end euncleut ous.tonee (1. m5
If lane seeme lontheeee Ynto tixee. se rch the secretes of rhieicke.

therefig tfigp r 13% kngg the hidden unturee of hearhee {.. 251)

J
I!
he

I

W in nzyet hen: radars aniing o!

 

“he variants of 'there' (' therein. ' 'thereby. ' ’w‘ereof.’ 'wherewith')

V

rev be c filled conjunc’ive a-lver‘)e becruee they new: two functions. one
to connect statements are another to extrese eone circumstance of niece.
Trown any: that adverbs refixel to urcnuslti ne h we t} to force of pro-

noune. hut thrt thty are co manly reckoned as edve be. flee their use

“l.
,0 -J

1 8 arc}: 331cc

fire to rake triel. not at the first gluunce so to settle hie minds. as
though he wer willie» to be *u;ht. vhen he ri“ht esc~.L.e --(II.182)

to c nclude. I {are hardly. the3h I gt richly. Ellen maxeth we when I
e old he; gin to sh: adow e L dies face. to drew a Lambee heed~~~(II. 321-22)

hten lerander you: i needs come to jewellee shop end paint . Act. ellee
3:1eced him at his backs (II._LE)

But vien friends at denurting woulde vtter neat. then te ares hinder most

(II, 1&3)

 

 

In one teenage the indicative farm r*p’.eced tze subjunctive: 'fiut
t? is t;ai:e for a warning. if ezer t ou.inrre. when thou eheuldest test. or

follow. thine ovne will’ (II. 152)

f} The subjunctive of oten+lnlit occurs in adverhiul clnfiees

azureeeine i"definite extent aft r uhraeee of centerieon.

.l

for Lhileutue seeing so food couneuile could not are ceede of any 111
caneeiut. t?oukh once ageine to eollicite his friend. :znr that in such
tearnee as he nigft be neat agreeable to “u hu~g tune (II 1:3}

 

__ 21;}

(«cold firmm, :39 Initii‘lu' of English '3 'rrzr. p. 89.

126

i

l'imx onFIy cars th1 bone hc-therto to match thee with such a one. as
ofculdo be of good wealth able to E.aynteine thee (I. 227)

I wis}o gou as much beautie a9 you would _hano,Ato hang on much vertuo '
us_10u o‘culd hone (11,190)

a ail y uonan iv time may mak" such a breach into a mans hearts on hir
teares may outer without resistaunco (1.225)

Let therefore my counsay13 be of such anctb oritio as it may commaund
you to be sober (I. 3'C)

I woulde therefore haue my 3 onth. so to bestowa his otudyo, as has nav
both boo store‘sad in t‘1e cv!r~r _v9€16 (I MYQ)

refrains from 3.11 s eh meats: an SL031 prouoke thine appetite to lust.
and all such ro; nee. as raw zIIure tly minds to folly (1.256)

and let try words so placoé bee Y'ta no man ray findo fault with thee
(1‘11 153‘ . - '

why tools, a Post is so ouch as one dhouldo 931. a.?oet (111.26)

222, Both Lipsas stoo~et iyll ghee yPoId7 will she bender Par. 0 air
as much to ycu.wou1d wish for hor chfn alroat touchethfl her knees
TIII. 66)

for convendation of nouns, I wish: you as much beautie ao_you won‘d @333,
so as you uouldo ondeuor to bane an much vertue as you.|hould hang
(II. to}

conning into the nidot of thece mutiners. cried as loudo as his years
mum gum..- (In. 1‘29)

and as long as horse had anie breath, and anio Knight ggpldo encounter
him, was content to hide the brunt of the strongest Enight (I, L5H)

But I wil herro rest my selfe. knowing th if I should runne no farre
as cautieL won} d carry me. I shonlde sooner want breath to tell her
yrr:iora (II 59-60)

and yet I neuor sown so much leather on wou1d_;eecg one: ahooea (III. 218)

I can oroue there hath bane two or three nnrchantos with me to hire
romeo to lay in vino: but that they doe not stand so conuenientlz_a9
they wold wiSh (III, 256)

Therefore good Unphuos boo as merryo as you max; bee, for time may: so
tourne that once a nyne you nave bee (1.239)

choose one ovary wry, as neere es rrv boo equnll in both (I, 283)

gzl. hwt heat than taught Manes thy non? Dior. 40 to as Inligg Ls figy be
t}1y scvres (11.351)

An? ynt so ouoh, as may acru;§ me of vngrotitnde towards thee. and ridde
*Lnn of the eusrition conciouod of me (II. 75)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

g) L special kind of the model subjunctive of :otentiality occurs in
'can' and 'could' statomrnts that express nossibility of action through the
ability to perform it. For the use of 'can‘ and 'could’ in independent
Itatements I refer to section 2c under indenondent use earlier in this
chapter. In dependent usage they occur in almost ovary variety of sub-

ordinato constructions. and their meanings are kzrgoly parallel.

g...
F.)
-e

I shall here follow the arrangement I employed in the case of independent
usage, listing 1) those instances of 'cen' and "Lonld' which retain more
or lees their earlier meaning and earlier tine distinction. and 2)
thoee instancee vfiich more or lees reflect the loss of earlier meaning and

time distinction.

1) 'Cen' and 'could' plus infinitive reflecting present and past

time distinction.

You thinke me as e.friend. so farre forth as I can graunt with modestie,
or you require with good manners (II. 106)

It ie this as I Can remember worde for vorde (I. 286)

that Athens hath bone, hat Athens in. what Athens chalbe I can 53633
(1. 28h)

Thine opinions ere so monstrous that éxcannot tell whether thou.wylte
cent a doubt (I. 300)

I loue the man well. but I cannot brooke his manner: (I. 322)

For neither can my selfe be merry now, 7 Her treat of ought that may
be 111m of you (111. 3143)

The fittest remedie that I can finde. I Is this to ease the torment of
your ninde (III. 380)

but novgyog‘cen eqz_no more of the head. begin with the purtenancee.
for that was your promise (III. 121)

Sweet VGDCh. thy face is lovely. thy bodie comely. & all that the exec
can eee enchanting (III. 189)

30 fit it is. that I cannot omit it for yt cp‘portunitie of the time (II. 39)

Doth Sanho bevitch thee. whone all the Ladies in Sicily could not wooe
(II. 388) ""

I. but my meieter yawning one day in the Sun. love crept into his mouth
before he could close it (III. #6)

I nuneuered for my selfe as I could.and for all men ee I thought (11. 221)

You eeyde you would eeke every one of them a question. which yeeter
night hene of 79 could ennevere (II. 325)

And Lepidue. which could not eleggg for the chatting of birdee. eet up
a beeete (II, 315)

I vil try whether I can better beere my hand with my hart, then I could
with nine eye (II. 357) .

lie drew in a table a faire tennle, the gates oven. & Venue going in. so
as nothing coulde be nerceiued but hir hacke (II. 211)

I came on neere. that I could feele e.eubatentiall knave from a sprites
ehadowe (III, M10) vi

 

 

2) 'Can' and 'could' plus infinitive expressing no definite time

128

ldietinction. 'could' referring freouently to action yet to come.

' Doeet thou.thinke “u,huee - - -euch a dullerde that he cannot donor;
You such a world it is. thnt gods can do nothing with-out golde. and who
'Xofi'nofiz might? (II. 19)
It in not once mencioned in the English Courte - - — that love cenne
be procured by such meance. or thnt arye canoe imagine euche myechiefe
(TI. 119)
'end he that can-not follow good counsel. neuer can get commoditie (II. 1])
Ineomuch that they acco pt Hyere their god that can doe al. and their
. Divel that will doe e11 (II. 116)
~but the gode that cenzgeue the deeiree of the heart. can no eesilie
withdrew the torment (III. 128)
2then this youhge infente shell growe in yearns and bee of that ryneneese
‘ 7that he can coneiue lenrninge (I. 257) "
Ety'ehe is so colde. that no £132_£§Q_1haug her thoughte (III. 69)
Fhet e quiet life ehel Dipeoe and I leade. then wee can neither byte nor
scratch (III, 70)
and little nytchere when they can holde no more. are as full as great
vessels that runne over (III. 75)
To have gold and not loue.(which cannot be purcheet by gold) is to be
a slave to gold (III. 118)
you thinke belike I could eleen.if I did but eee him (II. 399)
Ky mother acid I could be no ladde til I was twentie yeere olde, nor
keepe sheepe till I coulde tell them (II, tho)
This shall be written on.thy tomb. that though thy love were greater than
wiedone could endure (II. 398)
Cuoid. What eeid they of gifts? Mon. That affection could not be bought
with gold (III. 319)
Then Mice. whose heart no feeree couldgpenrce (III. 319)
Infinite are my creatures. vdthout which neyther thou.~nor Endinion. nor
any could loue or line (III. 2h)
They were beastly gods. that lust could make them seem like beaten (II. U3t)

 

 

 

§»In statements of obligation

The model subjunctive of obligation occure in Lyly a) in weakened
commands. b) in etetemente of moral or logical inference or preference. and

c) in legal. or ouaei-legal. pronouncements.

a) The eubJunctire of weeaened command in dependent statements in not

of greet frequency in Iyly. not-nearly eo frequent as it ie in indeoendent

statnrertg. file chief ezrl en tion is no doubt that the 'let'-clause. so
cannon in inde en “dart et.te: ents does not edrit cf use in debendent state-
ments. I list only two nasstges the command intention of which by context
seems clear. Such etetements tend to sin do over into the legal subjunctive.
For a discussion of the we kenod command as rrlhted to the imperative see
the section on the subjunctive of ohlignti3n in the preceding ch pter.
for the poore Fisher-n31 that was w rned l:e eFould not fish. did yet at
his d.ore n: he n to (II. I) .
Conoider we are in ?n;land, where our demeanour will be narrowly Marked
if we treads a wrie. eni our follyee mocked if vse wreir-.n I thinke

thou.3rt willing that no such t“nfileiQfili hd‘FSQoand I :“OV; thou art
wise to trevnnt it (II. 137)

 

b)? 1-3 elbjznctIV3 of more .1 0.14 loricnl inference or oreferencé occurs

Very frecuently. in virtually all kinds of eubordi

'3
13*

D constructions. with
many diff3r3nt auxiliariee, notably 'sFould.’ 'rust.‘ 'muet n39ds.‘
'ought.’ followed slwrys by an infinitive. 1M1 ve 3c cl3rr exrm leg of

'vould' and 'rieht.‘ ihe 1115M ufelt is ror3 frequently inglied than

glad

stntsd. 13 £°nernl these L rilirrie: aflrit of the same ecrznfic sh"

I
.1133

they do in irdanend3ut ststefiente.
'Should‘ is ver:r common indeed in such dint-orients.

I. but Cynthia, being in her fulnes. decayeth. as not delighting in her
"erectest beaut3.e. or withering when she shou?.d be most honoured (111.22)
Imone my ioies. there is one r;rlefe. that myd ans: ter. the mistrie of a
Fools hid. hath so much forgotten. that meet she should remewber.
auntie (I, hm) ’ “
0? all tfie grrifes yt must my nwtioncc grate I There's one that fretteth
in ya hivj'et degree I ?o 333 some oattoreillere bred un of late /
cronjin : tFe fruit yt sho uld sustaine ye Bee III. l19:3)
.All’s nrov nder for 3338:, but the arre I "l3 n rtiall tOPld of t is taLes
litle heed I 30 give them flowers 1t she Ed on thistle: feed (III. L97)
but the covetonn humor of you bott I contomne and wonder~et. being unfit
for a king. whose honor should consiste in libernltie. not greedines (III, 12h)

 

130

Love which should continue for euer. should not be began in an.houre (II. 12h)
but there was a little wag in Cambridge. that swore by Saint Seaton. he
would so swings him with Sillogismes. that all hartins answeres should
eke (III. 398)
Aunswered hin thus egayne speedsly. eswell to prevent the course hes
might otherwise take. as elsoto prescribe what way he should take (11.152)
Whose bitter agonies should cast every good Christian into a shieueringe
ague. to remember his anguishe. whose sweatigge of water and bloud
dhould cause euery devoute and zealous Catholique. to shed teares of
repentaunce in remembraunce of his tormentes (I. 298)
Hot to eat our heartes: That is. that wee should not vexe our selves
wyth thoughts (I. 281)
Iris I thought it should be :hee (III. 356)
and I an of that linde. that where youth is given to lone. the means shoulde
be removed (II. 181)
Lady I cannot vse as many words as I would. because you see I an weeks.
nor give so many thankes as I should. for that you deserue infinite
(II. 78)
And he speedeth sooner that speaketh what hee should.then he that vttereth
what he will (II. 119)
Philautus must doe what he will. Eunhuss not what he should (II, 102)

An indicative form is occasionally substituted for the subjunctive in

the second person singular.

hhether than go as thou wouldest. or tarry at hgme as thou shouldest (II. 27)

Her the authority of the magistrate which thou.shouldest reverence. can
allure thee to grace (I. 318)

if neither the care of thy parents when thou shouldsst comfort- - - can
allure thee to grace (I. 318)

'Kust' is extremely common in such statements.

This therfore remayneth that either I mustApine in cares. or perish with
curses (I. aha)

women confesse they must obey(III. k90)

I see my hoges must wither in their bud (III. L8H)

My heauiness is such. that I must stand still. amazed to see so greats
happines so sons bereft me (I. 597)

It was a verie good.horse. I must needs confess: and now hearken to his
qualities. and hane patience to heare them. since I must naie for
him (III, 21h)

And Ile asks for a silver snoone which wae lost 1aa3 dais. which I must
ufor (III. 202)

 

131

that one mayo loue when they see their time. not that they must lone
when others appoint it (II. 67)

For he that.mightie states hath feasted. knowes I Besides their meate.
they must be fedd with shewes (I. h5h)

See where she sits in whom we must delight (III. 2L7)

Litle dost thou know Callinachue with what wood trauailers are warned.
who must sleene with their eies open. least they be slain in their beds
(II. 26)

Then mark the course which now you must oursue (III. 355)

then thou hast not one place assigned thee wherein to live. but one
forbidden thee which thou must leave. then thou‘being denied but one.
that excepted thou,mai;t choose any (I. 315)

Gone. Dromis. it is my grief to have such a sonne that must inherit
my lands (III. 17h)

And you. pretie minx. that must be fed with lone upon seps. Ile take an
order to cram you with sorrows (III. 182)

I see that servants must haue Merchants cares. / To bears the blast and
brunt of every winde (III. 2D?)

She said. maides must kiss no men. I Till they did for good and all (I.hh7)

Then say I neighbors. that children must not see Edimion. because children
8 fooles speak true (III. 57)

For true it is that men themselves have by vse observed. that it must be
a hard winter . when one holfe eateth an other (I. 223)

for my books teach me. that such a wound must be healed where it was first
hurt (I. 21h-15)

Fayre Lady as I know you wise. so have I found you curteous. which two

uslities meeting in one of so rare beautie. must forshow some great
meruaigg (II. 6h)

Remember that greens grasse must turns to dry hay (II. 3M5)

Unhanpie man! that runneth on thy race. / I'Iot minding where thy erased
bones_must rest (III. MSG)

 

'hust needs' is almost equally common in such statements. The
combination had much the same force as 'must.‘ but separently the adverbial

particle was felt to be needed to give full force to 'must.‘

for I tell you we in Rochester spurr so many hackneys. that we must needs
snurre schollers. for we take them for hackneys (III. 206)

If wee doo it not wee are vndone 3 for we have broacht e. cosnage alreadie.
and my master bath the tan in his hand. that it must needs runne out
(III. 198)

Without dout Eu hues y“ dost me great wrong -o~thinking«.-to cast lone
in my teeth. which I haue already spit out of my mouth. which I must
needes thinks proceedeth rather for lacks of matter. then any good
meaning (II. 33)

Thou.hast rackts me. and curtalde me. sometimes I was too long. sometimes
to shorts. now to bigge. then too lyttle. so that I must needes thinks
thy bed monstrous or my body (II. 98)

 

 

132

If you thinks eyther the ground so slipperie. wherin I runne. that I must
needes fall.or my tests so chill that I must needes founder. it maybe
I will chafinge my course here-after (II. 197)

Then who can it bee but Cynthia. whose vertues being all divine. must
needes bring things to passe that bee myraculous (III. 51)

If you.want Laisters. ioyne with me. and earns Sir Tashas. who must needes
keeue more men. because he is towrrd marriage (III. uh)

Then did I ioy nowe doe I grieue. I That holy vows must needs be broken
(III. h87)

 

'Oughtfl is likewise very common in such statements.

Well. let vs to Cupid; and take heads that in your stubbornesse you offend
him not. when by entreaties zou ought to follow (III. 308)

Ah gentlemen it is a course which we ought to make (I. 261) u

I means to sette downs the touchestone where vnto one one ought to trust.
and by the which euerye one should try himselfe I. 290)

learns of the English Ladies. y nod is worthy to be worshipned with
the most price. to whom you ought to_g;ge all praise (II. 200)

Therfore I cannot repeat it as I would. nor delight in it as I ought (II. 33)

But thou.wilt say that no man ought to iudgs thy conscience but thy selfe.
seeing thou knowest it better then any (I. 309)

We will make no controversie of that which there ought to be no onestion
(II. 318)

and then shall you see thzt - ~ - - you ought to be as farre from pride.
as you are from novertie (II. 199)*fi

this noble man I found so ready being'but e strsungsr. to do me good.
that neyther I ought to forget him. neyther cease to pray for him (II. 198)

onely they accompto divinitie most contemptible. which is and.o§ght to
23 most notable (I. 287)

if it be so. that the contemrlation of the inwards qualitie ought to be
resEected more. then the view of the outward beautie. then doubtlesse
women eyther doc or should lone those best whose vertue is best (I. 201)

Knowing that rebukes ought not to weigh a grains more of salt then sugar
(11. 99)

Not-withstanding we will be bold to see you. and in the meanseason we

thank you. and ever. as we ought. we will pray for you (II. 81)
in
Indicative forms occasionally appear in the second person firegular.

C I would in repeating their vices thou couldest be as elocuent. as in
remembring them thou oughtest to be penitcnt (I. 25k)

or wer I as able to vtter my affection towards a sonne as thou.ogghtest
to chew thy duety’to thy sire then wouldest thou desire my life to enioy
my counsell (II. 15)

Iaor the rigor of the laws which thou oughtest to fears (I. 318)

c) The subjunctive of legal. or quasi-legal,pronouncements is not

133

always easily distinguished from the subjunctive of moral and logical
inference. I have included among the citations below several passages.
particularly those introduced by impersonal constructions. which might
be classified in either category. The auxiliarfids usually ‘should'

followed of course by an infinitive.

It was a laws among the Persions. that the Musitian should not lodge of
the Painter. nor aux: one meddle in that handy craft. where-in he
was note expert (II. 180)

Lycurgus set it downs for a lane. that where men were commonly drunken.
the vines shoulde be destroyed (II. 181)

When Alexander had owmaunded that none should paint him but Appelles.
none wrue him bfi Lysinpus. none engraue him but Pirgeteles.
Parrhosius framed a table (II. 20h)

I thought good that this my faythe should be set downs to finds favour
with the one. and oenfute the oauils of the other (I. 257)

But nee thincks it is good reason. that I shoulde be at nine owns
brydeell. and not gyven in the Church. before I know the Bridegrome
(1.228)

It is fitt it should with you remains (I, ”96)

Nseeeenri §t is that among friends there should be some everthusrtin"
(II. 1 3

It is not possible that a.face so feire. & n wit so sharpe. both without
comparison. ehuld not be not to lone (II. 337)

Because shee may loue one. is it necessarye shes should loue thee (II. 87)

then gentle medicines. have no force to purge. we must Vse bitter potions:
and where the zero is enither to be dissolved by plaieter. nor to be
broken. it is requisite. it should be launced (II. 138)

To the Lady Fleuias demennde concerning companie. it is requisite. the!
should meets (11,182)

You seems not to inferre that it is requisite they should meete. but
being in lens that it is convenient. least falling into a med needs.
they pins in their ovne peuishnesee (II. 172)

h In expreeeions of condition

In the preceding chapter I discussed at some length formal subjunctive
Ileage in conditional statements. Much of this disodssion concerned con-
ditional statements in genera. It is therefore as pertinent in the present

section as there. but to save repetit‘on I shall merely refer the render

13h

to the general discussion. Here we are concerned with the modal auxiliaries
’nmy.‘ ’shall.‘ ’vill.‘ 'can.‘ 'met.’ 'might.’ 'should.' 'uould.’

'could.‘ ‘durst' as subjunctives in condit’onal statementsl If there is
any doubt among grnmnnrians as to the subjunctive character of these
auxiliaries in general, there can be no question about their subjunctive

ééracter in conditional statements.

hany of these model subjunctives in conditional statements have formal
equivalents. One may say 'If he should be at home' or one may use the
older fermal 'If he be at home' without much difference in meaning.
although the former idiom is new more common. In Lyly and his time such
formal subjunctives were much more frequent than they are now.'~- if
exempted soules may be subiect to passions' (I. 51h) ceuld.have appeared
in Iyly as '--i! exewyted soules be subiect to passions.‘ Indeed the
formal subjunctive is much more frequent in Lyly in such conditions than
the modal. Lyly's '--yet if occasion shall serve. you shall find us
hereafter as willing to make amends as we are now ready to give thanks'
(II. 37) might have nopoared ’--yet if occasion serve. you shall find-. '
etc. Again Lyly’s ‘If this will not make Eggtig mad. malicious and
melancholic-co- than will we be desperate--‘ (III. MOO) could have been
as well 'If this make not Martin mad. malicious and melancholie--.' etc.
Again Lyly’s 'If to live and still be more miserable would better content
him. I would wish of all creatures to be oldest and ugliest' (III. 72)
could have been ‘If to live and still be more miserable content his better.
I would wish.1 etc. As I have said formal subjunctive: in such conditions

are more frequent in Lyly than medals.

135

The materials from lyly I have arranged in a) conditional statements
with models in the present tense (with present and future implications)
and b) conditional steterents with models in the past tense (with various
time imnlicetions). Under ench.category I shall consider the various
models in their various uses and the substitution of newer indicative

forms (chiefly in the second person singular).
a) Conditional statements with models in the present tense.

‘Eey' is by phonetic devsIOpnent either present indicative or present
subjunctive and originally meant 'to be able, to have power.‘ Gradually
the meaning weakened until it came to eXpress merely some kind of possibility
although there is evidence that something of the original meaning ner-
sisted for a long tine. perhaps to the present time. 'May' is now
frequently replaced by 'can,‘ which has undergone a change in meaning
from ‘to be nble' to ’to be permitted.‘ In Lily ‘may' expresses three

allied frequently overlanning'fiotione.
l) 'Eny' ernresses permission.

Well. that must be borne, not blem'd that cannot be changed: for my
part. if I may enigy the fleece of my sillie flock with quietnes. I
will neuer cure three flocks for his ambition (III. 1&6)

‘3: I ma; sneak in your cast. quoth Iffidc (the glasse being at my nese)
I thinks. wine is such a whetstone for wit (II. 55)

For this I sweare,-- that I will neuer consent to lone him, whose sight

(if I may so any with modestie) is more bitter vnto no then death (II. 1&0)
and if this may passe with thy good lyking. I will then goe forwards to
publish the rcetfi(III, 18)

As there is watch nge. --so is there also many holydsyes. & if I may

sneaks all in one words. ease is the sauce of labour (I. 277-78)

2) 'May' expresses contingency. Here 'nay' is nothing but a color-

less forn word and the notion is more frequently in Lyly expressed by means

136

of the formal present subjunctive.

If a field mszAbe pitdht.we are reedie (III. L06)
our Coast ble commonnds this day to be kept holliday. all our shesheards
are assembled. and if shenheards!pestimes may please. how iqyful
would they be if it would please you to see them; -- they means to call
this day the shepheards black W (I. LT81)
If to talks with me. or continually to be in thy company; EEK in any
respect sstisfie thy desire. assure thy selfe. I wil attend on thee
(II. 7'!)
Sweet Demo. if Stesies any content thine eye. commaund my Neate. my
flock, fnd tender Kids. thereof great store do oursnred our plaines
(III, 2;?)
If Courtlye braueryg maz_nllure hir. who more gallant. then they? (II. 87)
I was borne in the wylde of Rent. of honest Parents. and worshipfull.
whose tender cares. (if tie togiggsee of r rents 52: be so termed)
pronided all things even from my very cradell. vntil their graues (tl.h9)
He that beholdeth this Hearse. --or what soul. houering in the ayro cunr
this disconsolate ?eeroe. dissolueth not into tsetse? (if exempted
soules may be subiect to pessions) (I. 51%)
Ent'if either my friends. or my selfe. my goods. or my good will 23:
stands thee in steeds. 199 no. trust mes, commaund me. as farre foorth.
as thou censt with modestie. & I may grannt with nine honour (II, 77!
There is e Lake (as Aristotle reportsth) neore vnto the riner of Eridanus.
vherin (if on: Posts fiction may bears credit of faith) proud Phaeton
being strooken with lightning. was finally drowned (1. 51h)
If these ma34ssrne for to entice. / Your presence to Lane: Paradice. /
*_Then come with me. and be my Deere: / And we will straits begin the
years (III. L82)
so I be e I shall finds a hearts in you willing to accomplish my request.
1finish it I may obtein. assure your selfe y‘ Demon to his Pythios (I. 198)

 

1') 'Hay' exnrelses capability. Here 'may' represents a survival of
something of the original meaning. The notion weaxens and shades imper-

centibly over into the ease d meaning.

Sing you. plain you. but sing ani play with truth. / --I{:gpds may. digg/
Here shall my tombs be plaste. / And this engreven. 'Fonde Phoebus.
Daohne chaste' (I. h79)

I will to Apollo. whose Oracle must be my doome. and I fear me. my dis -
honor. because my doom was his. i:_kiggs may disgrace gods: and gods
they disgrace, when they forget their dueties (III. 152)

lovely Pandora. if a shegherds teares / {a1 nous thee vnto rueth, pity
my state (III. 263?—

137

Morris I will be as I may. but if I no! heereefter as thou.meanest. I
will not. and therefore farewell Lucille (I. 2&0)

And yet 1; it threaten no man harms. and.ggzg doe you good. you shall
find my socrocio to be great. though my science be anal. and there-

fore say on (II. 110)
I salute thee in the Lords. & I am at length returned out of Englando.
a place in my opinion (if any such may be in the'earth) not inferiour

to s.Pnrodiee (II. 169)
I on content to inside thee tho niece in my heart which thou.dssirsst and

desoruost abouo all other: hhlch consent in no if it no! out ways
breeds thy contentation. sure I am that it will every way works my

comforts (I. 225)

.13 nxlnrechtes ngzrperswade. (and I pray thee let them persuade) I
wouldo wish than first to be diligent: for that uonenns desire nothing
more then to hone their soruants officious (II. 390)

Agreed. give no. Ile shadow ye from fears. If this nng_do it (III. 3H6)

If we mg; any'vny redresse your none. I Commaund our best. barns will we
do you none (III. 3b2)

'Shall' represents the 03 present tense of the preterito-prssent verb
'sculan' meaning 'to be under necessity. to be obliged.’ 'Shnll‘ in
conditional statements occurs very extensively in Lyly as a sign of the
subjunctive. - in statements that might use. and elsewhere actually do
use. the nrosont formal subjunctive. While some of the citations below
indicate orcsent contingency. and others more definitely future contingency.
the distinction is of no great innortencs. since elsewhere. in parallel
instances. Lyly employs the forwal present subjunctive in either case.

One point however should be omwhasized: Lyly used 'shall& in such.stnto-

ments viflh all three persons. although my materials show more citations of

'shsll' with the third person. and seems to be totally unaware of the

distinction which later gremmorinns make. In all such instances 'shall'

is a purely colorless particle. having lost every bit of its independent
rnosning and is without question merely s sign of the subjunctive. I shall

311st first citations showing present implications and secondly those

showing more definitely future indications.

133

If I shall says vnto the sinner thou.sha1t dye the death. yet if hes
repent and doe Iustice he shall not dye (I. 362)

And if susr after this. I shall seems iealous over thee. or blynded
towards my selfe. vse me as I deserue. shamefully (11.152)

If the ticked man shall recent of hys wickednesse which hee hath committed.
wand keeps my commaundements. doinge lustice and iudgement. hee shall
lyve the lyfe. and shall not dye (I. 3-2)

It is the Image. Fades. of the Idoll eat so manic serue against theire
will. ——-which ifyyour e'cellent is eshell vouchsafe an; tyne to wears.
the Knight wisheth it may be a tatch (1.1. 55)

If E? counsell Shel seems rigorous to fathers to instructs their children.
or heauie for youth to follow their parents will: Let them both
remonber (I. 2 (0)

Children are to be or estised if they shel vse any filthy or vnseemly talks
(I. 278)

Ageyne my sonne if sinners shall flatter thee gyue no care vnto them.
flye from the euill. and cuils shall flye from thee(I. 350)

Agayns fleie saith the holy Byble nowe shall the scourge fal Vpnon thee
for thou hast sinned. beholde I set a curse before you to day if you shall
not harken to the commnundementee of the lords. all they that haue
'Ioreaken the Lords shall be can; unded (I. 300-1)
win is the first. and if in any place it shall dysnlcnse. I will take
more paines to perfect the next (111.15)

Therfore. if we shall sin5.giue me my part quidkly (II. 395)

let him curse himselfe that some no wings to flie abroad. whose feathers
if his ioaleueie ehtl’ brooks. my policie shall inn (III. 331)

But as the true geldevis tryed by the touch. -—-if you shall accompte
Euuhucs worthy. assure your selfe. hee wyll has as readie to offer
hinselfe a sacrifice for your sweet sake. as your selfe shall boa
willinee. to emnloye hym in your seruice. (I. 219)

If you rLordshic s‘>l accent my'good wil which I alwaies desired. I will
_patietly bears the 11 wil of t2: malicious. which I neuer deserued (II. 181)

I could be euen with my mother: and so I will. if I shall call,you.mother
(Ile L12)

But if any shgl2yee it as it war a precept for youth to tattle extenpore.
he wil in time bring them to an immoderate kinds of humilitie (I. 271)

But.i£ among all his ceruauntee he shall esgzg one cyther filthye in his
talks or foolishe in his behauiour. ~-.him hee settes not as a suruayour
and overseer of his manners. but a superuisour of his childrens
conditions and manners ..-(I, 2&7)

If any shall lone the c ilde for his comely countensunce. him woulde I
bane to be banished as a most daungerous and infectious beast (I. 280)
i:_hee shall loue him for his fathers sake. or for his own good qualyties.
him ueuld I hang to be with him alwayes as superVisonr of hys manner

(I. 283)

If cucr yin loued. :13u h=r1* feu.nd t .e li.k~. if seer sh:sll lone. you shall
t:.ste no loose (II. 51)

‘l‘ch gree.t a vnlerserued .(indenesse. though we can-not requit with the
lyke. yet if occasion shall_ggrue. you shall finds vs heeresfter as
willing to make amends. as we are now ready to giue thankes (II. 37)

 

 

 

 

139

if in anything we shall chance to discouer our lewdnee. it will be in
ouer boldneese. in gaxinge at you. who file our harte with Joye. and
our eies with wonder (I. 1‘77)

and seeing I shall hardly bee induced euer to match with any. I beseeche
you if by your Fatherly lens I shall bee compelled. that I may match
wyth— such a one as both I may lone . and.you may like (I. 229)

-'Uill' is by origin either the present indicative or the present
subjunctive of DE 'willan' meaning ’to wish. to be willing.‘ It has since
in some instances become a colorless particle. but in other instances
something of its original meaning has survived. right down to the present
time. I have no citations of 'will' with the first person singular and
plural and only a few with the second person singular (to be considered

shortly under indicative substitution). My citations from Lyly involve

largely the third person singular and plural and the second person plural.

'Hill' occurs in Lyly in conditional statements as a colorless particle.
As is to be eXpected, in View of the original meaning. it is with inanimate
subjects that the weakening of meaning would first occur. thenever 'will'
occurs in weakened form it expresses contingency and in such statements is
exactly parallel with the present formal subjunctive iqhther instances.
I have many citations of this use of 'will' with inanimate subjects but

only two with personal subjects (one with 'you' and one with 'ehe').

But if it will please your Highnesee to View it. that rude Champion at
your fairs feete will laie downe his fouls head: and at your books
that Lad'e will make her mouth her tongues mus (1. M25)

if no slumber will take hold in my eyes. yet will I inbrace the golden
thoughts in my head, and wish to melt by musing (III. 38)

jf’this aunswere wil not content thee, I wil shew'thy letters (II. lhO)

Yes. yes, if all the trauailg of conquering the world will set either
thy body or mine in tuen. wee will vudertake then (11, 3555

If this will not egg; Martin mad; malicious and melancholie -—-then will
we be desperate. & hire one that shall so translate you out of French
into English. that you will blush and lie by it (III, hOO)

11w

if by hir wantonesse she will neuer want wher she likes. yet by hir wit
she will euer conceals who: she loues (II. 63)

Take heede do not at first shott yelde I Their tongues will once the
bettell sounde I At last you sure shall win the field I If that an well.
will keeps yo’ grounds (III. M63)

'Will' in conditional statements seems to retdis in Lyly something of
its original neaning ('to wish. to be willing') whenever the subject is
personal. It is therefore not always replaceable by the formal sub-
Junctive. although it is sometimes difficult to draw a hard and fast line

between ‘will' as a particle and 'will' as a full verb.

if he will not commend it. let him amend it (II. 6)

If Martin will fight Ditie fight. wee challenge him at all weapons. from
the taylors bodkin to the watchmans browns bil (III. ltoo)

and come what can come. Iupiter shall procre. / If fayre Pandora will
accept his loue (III . 219)

gold will say it is no treason to loue. £9.32. But how W
suffer thee to see my person! (II. 3%)

if you wil not amend your manners. I wil study to fly further from you.
that I may be nearer to honesty (II. 335)

I know not what you are. neither an I acquainted with your dyet; but.
if you will goo with no. you shall haue cheers for a Lady (1. h92)

And now Gentlemen. if you will gins care to the tale of Fidus. it nay be
some gill be as watehfull as Philautus. though many as drousie as Euphuee
(11s 9) '

But if you will imgine that great iiagnifioo to haue sent his three
Daughters into England. I would thus debate with then before I would
bargin with them (II. 62) ,

If therefore you will make no priuie to all your deuises. I will procure
such meanes. as you shall rescuer in short space (II. 73)

If you will Jaint. as you are a king. your haieetie may beginne where you
please (II. 3'59)

Fairs youth. if on will be aduised by use. you shal for this time seeks
none other Inns. then my cane II. 380) ’

Phao. you may make me sleeps. if you will! (II. 1401)

And if you will but accept a willing minds in steeds of a costly repeat.
I shall thin): my selfe beholding vnto you (II. In)

Let Heptune haue his right if you will hag; your quiet (II. 1456)

If Icu will be cherished when you be olde. be curteous while you be young
( . 203

Wee thanks them; and if they will come to Memphios house. they shall take
parts of a had dinner (III. 207)

In one instance 'will' expressed habitual or repeated action by reason

lhl

69mmuL
of innate nature or perverse determination (with the therd person. it

should be noted).

if’like dawes. you will be caw about Churches. build your nests in the
"steeple. defile not the quier III. h12)

'Can' represents orighnally the indicative present singular of DE
'cunnan‘ meaning 'to know. to have knowledge of.‘ later 'to know'how.
to be eble.‘ 'Can' gradually lost its original meaning and took over the
original sense of 'may' ('to be able'). In the materials from lyly 'can'
means 'to be able.‘ Curiously I have no citations of 'con' with the second
person singular. 'It is to be observed that in these instances 'can' is
not replaceable by the formal subjunctive and that in two thirds of the

citations 'nay' is no adequate substitute for 'cen‘.

But repairs vnto as often. and if I cannot remogg_the effectes. yet I
will manifest the causes (II. 383)

How will I larch into the fields. where if I cannot encounter with my
fouls enemies. I will withdraw my selfe to the River. a there fortifie
for fish (III. 29)

It came by nature. and if none can take it awaie. it is perpetuall (111.176)

Sweet Keptune. if Venus can do any thing. let her try it in this one

- thing. that Dians.nay finds as small comfort at thy hands. as Lone
hath found curtdsie at here (II. M67)

All the better. we shall haue good sport hereafter. if we can_gn$ leysure

III. 28 '

But soft. here comes Motto. now shal we hens a fit time to be reuenged.
if by deuise we can make him say. Hydas hath asses cares (III. 155)

You can do lyttle yf you cannot maister your words (I. h61)

Touching the court. if on can. iue to any instructions. we shal think
the evening wel spent (11.37)2

Nay. I at?) seeks a new Maister if you can speak nothing but verses

III i

If deserts can nothing prevails I will practise deceipts. and what faith
cannot doe. coniuring shalI_(II. 108)

_;f all these testimonies of the Scriptures cannot sake thee to acknowledge
a lyuinge God. harken what they saye of such as be altogether in-
credulous (I. 295)

_1! they cannot lonell. they will roue at thee (III. h01)

1M2

'Must‘ represents OE 'mgste'. the preterite of the verb 'mottn.’ in
the meaning 'to be allowed.’ In form 'must‘ may be derived from the OE
indicative or subjunctive. In recent years. the last 50-100. 'must' has
taken on.present meaning and at the present cannot be used to refer to
the past - another instance. in fact. of the preterite - present shift.
hhile the meaning has changed radically in the course of time. it is not
new. and perhaps never was. replaceable by the formal subjunctive. From
Lyly I have only two citations of its use in conditional clauses and in
neither is the time implication altogether clear. In the first citation
the time inplication seems present or future: in the second more definitely

past - the unreal past with reference to the present or future.

hay. if you must weigh your fire by ounces. & take measure of a mans
blast. you may then make of a dramme of winds a wedge of gold (II. #51)

The lyks must I crane at your handes. that if of forceiypu.nust consent
to any one. whether would you.haue the proper nan. the wise. or the

rich (II. 72)

There is in Lyly a fair sprinkling of forms in -'t' or -'st' in the
second person singular in such conditional statements. In one instance
the -'st' fern is used with the second person plural pronoun. Such sub.

etituted ferns are to be regarded as indicative. but the notion is still

unquestionably'subjunctive.

j§;§ltogethsr thou.naist not be cured. yet naist thou.be comforted (I. all-12)
Vnharmed gins ears. that thing is han‘ly canght./ That cost some deere.
if thou maist ha't for naught (III. h71)
But if thou wylt stil nerseuer in thine obstinacie thine end shal be
worse then bhy beginning (I. 295)
how it reststh. Dipsas. that if thou wilt forsweare that vile Arts of
Enchaunting. Geron hath promised againe to receiue thee (III. 78)
But to end all. if thou wiltfigygg with vs. we will make a match betweene
the two fooles_(III. 135)
But if thou.wilt hens bondes. thou shalt haue a bushell full (III. 21h)

1b}

Therefore if thou wilt follow my aduise and prosecute thine own deter-
mination thou shalt come out of a warme Sunne into Gods blessing (1,322)

If thou.vilt deale soberlie uiflhout ecoffee. hou.ehalt be answered
grauely without ieete (III. RIO)

Thus hast thou if thou coast vse it. the whole wealth of the world

(11. 17)

But if thou.cenet not line chastly chuee Iuch an one. as maye be more
commended for humilitie. then beautie (II, 16.1?)

If hou.censt defie thy best friend, what wilt thou doe to thine enemiet
(11 115) -

If therfore Philautue._yn cu. stéeet but this {ether to nine arrow. y“
Ihalt Iee me shoot Io near. 1 thou wilt accompt me for a cunning
”Cher (I. 213)

Eeeemble the Bee which out of the dryeet and bittereet Eime sucketh
moyItg sweet Howey, and if thou canIt out of the courte. I. p ace
of more pompe than pietie, nucke out the true iuice of perfection (1.309)

Follow me if tiou dPrlt. and fight it out (111.269)

Originally none of the preterite.present verbs. nor 'villan' had
second person Iingular forms in 't’ or ‘It' in the present indicative.
but already in OE euch forms had established themselvee analogicallfiki. 0..
"bu. meaht: '155. Icealt.’ '4111 wilt. ' “pi cunIt.' etc.) In 02
the subjunctive had no such form: for the Iecond person Iingular preeent.

z:
the older subjunctive forms being 'nége.‘ 'Ieyle.' 'wille.' 'ounne,’
'mote' (original present of 'uuet'). Gradually in the oouree of time
the ehaIOgiccl second perIon forms of the indicative came to replace
the original subjunctive formI. There can not be any doubt however of
'the subjunctive character of these Itatemente. Lyly uIeI the older Inb-

Junctive forms. 'if thou may.’ 'if thou Iha11.' 'if thou vill.‘ etc..

infinitely'nore frequently than he uses the indicative substituted forms.

b) conditional staterents with mode 9 in the past tense.

The past medals 'might.‘ 'sfould.' 'would.‘ 'could,‘ and

lhh

'durst'zs) are historically weak preterites of preterite-present verbs
created to replace the old preterites after these became presents. The
past models have ceased to @911” to past time - a further indication of
their subjunctive character. For example. 'might.‘ 'shonld.‘ ’would.’
and 'could' are new interchangeable with their respective present tense
forms with only slight variations of meaning. Conditions with the

past tense form increase the doubt and uncertainty relative to the action
of the verb. These preterite models. except 'could' and 'durst.‘ are

in Lyly replaceable by the formal subjunctive.

'Might' as the past of ’mey’ expresses in Lyly the various senses
of ‘nay.' It alsl expresses contingency in reference to past events.
thus reflecting something of its original preterite notion}. in which
use it is equivalent to 'tcre-able to.'- I have no example from Lyly of
'might' with the second person s’ngular and plural or with the first

person plural.

1) 'hight' espresses permission (somewhat more doubtful or

hesitant than 'may').

“

'1
('5) Perhaps the distinction between 'dare,‘ and full verb. and 'dnre,‘
a.modal. should be mentioned.‘ 'Dare,’ the full verb has a
preterite 'dnred.‘ takes 'to' with the infinitive. and adds
'I' in the third person present indicative singular; while 'dare,‘
the model. has the preterite ‘durst‘ and does not take the
infinitive sign 'to' or the third person 'I' sign. .coording to
Joseoh and Elizabeth Mary wright (An Elementnrz_flistorical New
English Gremngg. p. 191) ’dare’ as a full verb has been common
since the sixteenth century

1L5

And if I nyght crave ovrdon. I wenld a little accuaint you with with the
canon wealth of my 3999 (II, ME)

F9 to sweete ureiere added great uremieee; ?, either deeirous to make
trail of his pater. or killing to prolong mine owne life, Caught yo
ry handful of eznd. consenting to his suite, if I miLht live as many
yezrcs as there tare graines (II. 381)

they shetfle them-selves es badde es beats. and push worse then my Bees.
rte in my conceit: though I neye seeme pertiall, observe more order then
they. (and if I myght any so of my good Bees.) more honestie (II. L3-hh)

 

 

W
2) 'might' expresses present of future c>ntingency (sonewhet more

doubtful than 'may').

if reason night nothing;perswede v: to wiedome. yet shame ehould provoke
vs to wyt TI. 2L6)

Ah my Phileutue if the wasting of our money might not dehort vs. yet
the wounding of our mindes should deterre Vs (I, 2h6)

Although my breet yet neuer harbored loue. / Yet dhould my bouniie
free your eeruitude: f If loue might well consort our Laiestie. / And
not debase our matchleeee dignitie (III, 252?)

If therfore it mig§t st nde with your pleasure (Mistres Lucille) to glue
your censure I would take the cantrary (I. 203)

Hoes growne of late. as fatherly end milde. I As euer father was vnto his
childe: I And sent no forth to search the coast about./ If so my hen
might be to finde him out (III. 382)

I were blessed if I might hone him recouered (III. 60)

I uerceiuing hir to stand so stifly. thought if I right to reooue hir
footing, and replyed ageine (II, 72)

if to die night be euendee. I would not line till to morrove (III. 72)

3) 'might' erureeses caraoility.

It is my purpose, if I might obtaine/ A ulece of refuge where I might
remeine (III. 350)

I would not forsake him to hsue thee: no not if I might ther-by prolong
thy life. or sane mine owns (II. 76)

If I my eelfqhiéht c‘oose my kinde of life. / her thou. nor any else (would
stay with it. [—1 finde my selfe vnfit for company (III. 2L6)

And surely were it not to confute thy detestable heresie. and hringe thee
if it might be to some taste of the holy Ghost, I would abandon all
place of thy abode, for I thihcke the grounde Locursed\¥hereen thou
standout (I, 300)

Our intent was at this time to moue inward delight. not outward lightnesse.
and to breede (if it might bee)eoft smiling, not loude laughing (II. 371)

My good Fidue. if the encreuaing of nyysorrowee. might mittigete the
extremitie of thy sicknes. I could be content to resolue my selfe into
teeres to ridde thee of trouble (11, 7h)

 

 

1&6

if_t1~e n1ght e.unswere my true meaning. I uo.ld exceede in cos t. though
in courtesie I know not how to co: pare wit} . you (I I. L7}

 

h) 'might' with the perfect infinitive expreeeee contingency referring

to past event annivelent to 'had beeen able to.’

if threats might tame feared my heart. T'ydae being a king, might heue
ccmmannded my affections (III. 12h)

If ConiurntioneL Characters, Circles. Figuresl Fenders, or Furies might
haue wrought anyc thing in lone. kedee woulde not haue suffered Ieeon
to alter his ninde (II. 117)

thy did the soldiers of Caesar endure such famine in Phnrehlia. if one heerbe
night h uc e eed so many heartee (II 117)

if loue1_golde1‘or anthoritie might bane inchaunted no. Hyde: had ob-
teyned by lone, golde. end Fatheritie, oxzorum ei ninguln, nontrem

flee tere non potera.nt i;otnissent omnia mentem “(111, 125)

 

 

 

 

'Should' no the past of 'ehnll‘ is in conditional statements in Lyly
a weakened 'sha11.' Since Lyly's time in many idioms 'ehould‘ has a
tendency to displace ’ehall;' that is. the tendency in to say. 'If I should
go - ' instead of {5; I shall go - .' In Lyly the 'ehould' idion ie
interchangeable with the formal present subjunctive. A3 with 'shall’
'ehould' is used with all persons. Indeed it is most 1’ ecnnm with the
6 1rd person singular: lees frequent with the first person eingular;
I have a few citations with first and third perecne plural. a few with the
second person eingula (with indicative subatitntione: see below). and one
with the second :ereon flural. 'Shoufid' in conditional statements in Lyly
exyreeeee Various notions. f

1) 'Shonld' expresses present or future contingency (interchangeable

in Iyly with 'shnll' or the formal present subjunctive).

117

If I e onld canaere rv blond wit! thy birth, I am as noble (II. (6)

I Leone the b11018 course of t‘1e Bible v3 ich if I eiould beleeue then
must I also beleeue that I am an abiect (1.300)

Trnely I were very cruell and herds hearted if I ehould not lune thee
(I. 221)

If I should telke in words of those tt'nge which I bone to conferre with
thee in writingee. certee thou wouldeat lush for shame. and I weepe
for sorrow (I. 316)

If I should offend. in the one I were to bold. if in the other too
hes-qtly (I, 225')"

If I should hollow they were all 7ndone (III. 268)

nfintlemefi—if I ehoulde nehg you ihether in the making of a good ewerde. yron
were more to bee required. or eteele. euro I am you woulde aunswere
that both wet; necessarie (II. 176)

I but if new I should ende. I had ben better neuer to heue boson (II. 108)

Pho so watchfull as hrietotle. who going to bedde would hone 3 bell of
braeee in his hande. that if hee shoulde bee take; in e eloaber. it
night fall and a.wake hym? (1,276)

wHy E=hilnutue. that h1rme were it in love. if the heart should veelde
his right to th1 eye. or the fancie his force to the eare (II.159)

All the blood in my bodie would be in my face. if he should noke me
(as the question among men is common) are you a maide? (11. ENG)

If’he e‘oulde dieconer hie lone. then woulde Camille thinke him not to
be secrerte (II. 136)

if she ehonldgyeelde at the first assault he eoulde thinke hir a lyght
huewife (I. 219)

Such force hath time and triall wrought. that if Thireue ehoulde dye
I woulde be buried with him (II. 77)

Sweet Candiue. if thy father should one vs alone. would he not fret?
(111.179)

I feare‘éijthe water should beg__ to oval. thou wilt want cunning to guide

II. 37

Stay Ioculo: alas it cannot be: / If we shoudd_part. I loose both her
and thee (III. 353)

An euill medicine for to women: for if we ehuld be forbiddgn_to none
Garue. we ehuld chat nothing but Garuei(II. 397)

You obiect. that I haue many'Mistrieeee: I answere. you.hnne ten times
as many eerunnts. and if you should nicke a quarrel. why'ehould not I
bring my M1ntreeeesrinto the field against your eerunnte? (I. h87-86)

if IEI reasons 3hould_goe as current. then were Lone no torment (II. 158)

I. but if all vertuoue Indies should geelde to all that be louing. or
all amiable gentlewonen entertaine all that be amorous. theyr
vertnree would bee accounted vices, and their beauties deformities
(III he)

I

 

 

 

 

 

2) 'Should' expresses future contingency from a point in time in the

past (interchangeable with the preterite of the verb).

1h8

If 5510 wilzp Vlyseee should thine maddneese. there was amonge the:
elwayee some ralanedes to reveale him (II. 197)
3) 'Should' with the perfect infinitive expresses a contingency
thought of as in the pest.
Again. but he there. if I shold haue waded any further. & sounded
the depth of their deceipt. I should either'haue procured your die-
pleaeure. or incurred ya suepition of fraud (1. 202)
if I should {nine more then others hone tryed. I might be thought too
Poetienll (II. 3h)
'Would' is the weakened past form of 'vill.‘ As an entirely color-
less particle. with an inanimate subject. 'would' ie interohangeeble with
’will‘ and the formal present subjunctivo. Apparently in Lyiy"wou1d'
could be used with any person. perhaps because more or loss of the
original meaning survives. although I actually have no instances of the

first porIon or third,porlon plural in.my material.

1) 'would' expresses contingency (here ’would‘ in a colorless

auxiliary).

If to liue and still be more miserable uould‘better content him. I would
wish of all creatures to be oldest and Vglieet (III. 72)
how ioyful would they be if it would nlease you to see the: (I. 151)

2) 'Rould' occurs with something of its origin suing {to with.

to be willing.’

If I would pzwth pictures. I hnue pong}: at home (11. 3119)
could tell that these ere not nine. if I would bleb it lyke a woman
(III. 209) d

if Ginthie her selfe would come in his place. the niece that oonteynde
him should not be too little to receeve her (I. h93)

If zour Highnesee would be aduised by nee. then would I rob for king-
domee III. 131

 

1149

IS deeds Euphnee. if the Kinngould resign hie right to his legato.
then were it notflEniese for the heart to yeelde to the eyee (II. 159)

if Alexander wold feine eee me. let him come to no (11. 323)

if the Horeelech would eduenture to minister a Potion to e sick patient.

_win that he hath knowledge to giue e.drench to a diseased Horse. he
would.nake himself an Anne (1. 180)

if you would be embraced in the wayning of your brenery. he not equeynieh
in the waxing of your beautie (I, 203)

if ou,:w§uld be tested for olde wyne. be in the mouth e pleasant Grape

“111;: 203

hietreee (quod he).ig <you.would hgz all my thoughts at that price. I
ehonlde neuer he wearye of thinking. but eeeinge it is too deere. reade

it. and take it for nothing (1. 22h)
hadene. i: you.wou1de compare the etate of Cynthia with your owne. and the

height of Lndinion hie thoughts. with the neaneneeee of your fortune.

you would rather yeeld then contende (III. 23-2h)

'Conld' ee the past tenee of 'cen' carries considerable of its meaning

'to be able.' But it can he need with different shades of meaning.
Sometimes it carriee something of the implication of ‘were able to.‘
that ie. of n conditicn contrary to fect. Souetiuee it ie replaceable by
'might’ and comes accordingly to suggest the idea of eimple contingency.
Sometimes it suggests contingency without reference to any‘ particular

tine or ebility. I have no citatione Iron Lyly of 'conld' with the eeeond

pereon'plurel.

l) 'Oould‘ exoreeeee ability (either with clear future implicatione
or with future implicatione from c point in the pest: equivalent to 'were

able' with suggestions of condition contrary to fact).

I imagined 1;:by denice I coulde thruet my children into your honeee.
they ehould be wel brought Vp in their youth. and wisely prouided for
in their age (III. 225)

Now. if I could neete with Rieio. it were a world of waggery (III. 183)

you know my fire. charged me earnestly to retaine ell idele heerveet-
folkee that pact thie way; and my meaning was. that. if I could hq;§
then all thie night and to—morrow. on Monday morning to carry them into
the fielde (I. ”92-93)

150

lane in golden shower obtain'd. I Hie lone in e towre reltran'd 6 So
perhaps if I CQQlQ doe.I 1 night hold,ny'eveete lone to (III. 88)

How.if I chuld.compnsse e.netch between my eonne and Stellioe daughter.
nywconference of to parents. and without theire. I ehould he bleeeed.
he cooened. and thou.for euer set at libertie (III. r175)

It were a shame Alexander ehould desire to commnund the world. if he could
not commaund himeclfe (II. 357-58)

PHilautue did not sleepe about hie businee. but presently eent thie letter.
thinking that if once he could fasten friendehippe againe Vppon
Euphuee. that by hie meanee he ehould conpneee hie lane with Gunilla
(II. 1&8)

Key master. if wit could do it. I could tell you more (111. 353)

If that Martin can; 5; thatch n hie Church. this cane ecnbehip ehould
bee en Elder (III. 305)

we determined to spend some perte of our tine and treeeure in the Englieh
court. where if we could finde the reporte but to be true in.hnlfe. wee
ehoulde not onelye thinke our money and traueyle well employed. but
returned with interest more then infinite (II. 37)

 

2) 'Gould’ expreesee generic action (action conceived of ae involving.
not epecific ability. but endowmente of nature; hence as true of one time

as another).

I could lgke the man well. if he could be contented to be but a can
(11. 32 )

the best eimplee are very simple. if the phieition could.not apolie
then (11. 1&9)

But let.hin alone. the better'he ehadovee her face. the more will he
burne hie owne heart. And now if gfinenne cold.neet with hence. who.

z dare giy. lookee no leane ee if Diogenee dropped out of his nose
11. 33 .

hy ceee were light Depheetion. and noteworthy to he called lone.‘1g
reason wgre a remedy. or eentencee could nl .thet eenee cannot conceiue

11e 331 ’

hut the good 3*. when once he knew. / Thie raine wee like to fall on
you. I If St§_gould weepe, he had wept as much I do when he did the
Lady leade I That did on burning iron trend. I To Ladiee hie respect ie
such (I. #96)

If fathers knew but how to leave I Their children wit no they do wealth./
& eculd conetraine then to receiue I That physicke which bringe per-
‘fect health. [—19 world would not admiring etand. I A womane face and
womans hand (III. h90)

If flude of teeree could cleanse ny follies p at. I -¢~Then would I cry.
weepe. eigh. and euer none.‘Ifihine errore. fault. sine. follies pnet
and gone (III. 11814)

 

151

3) 'Could' with the perfect infinitive erpreeeee ability or con-

tingency thought of as in the past.

Eristue. if 501d could hone allured nine eies. thou.knowest Mydas
that commeundeth all thinges to bee gold. had conquered (III. 12h)

The malice of Tellus hath brought this to passe. which if shee could
not hnue_intrented of nee by feyre neanee. shes would hone conneunded
by menacing. fer from her gather wee all our simples to uninteine
our eorceries (III. 39)

If incantations. or_potions. or enoroue egyings could haue prevailed.
Circee would neuer heue lost Vlysses. nor Phaedra Hippolitue. nor
Phillie DemOphoon (II. 117)

 

'Duret' is derived from the past of “dare.' 'fiare' has shown a
tendency to leave the nodal group and to become a regular verb. Although
it is difficult to any whether 'durst' be historically either. its usage
in the citations from Lyly follows the pattern of the other conditional
statements and I felt Justified in classifying it as subjunctive.

(Durst' in the four citations from Lyly expresses the meaning 'to have

the courage.’

If I durst trust ey'fece as well as I doe my habits. I would spend some
time to make pastime (II. tho)

And if I durst tell the truth. as lustie as I en heere. I lye vppon e
bed of boards (III’ 157)

‘EEE, It would better become thee to be more curteous. and frees thy selfe

to picnic. Diog. And you better to be leese. if you.durst displeegg
(II. 35 )

See where those Greece. and those Bowre of henu'n / hhich et thy conning
sung triumphell songs. / And emoothd the way. and strewd it with sweet
flowre. Now. if they duret. would step it with greene bowes. I Least
by thine absence the yeeres pride decay (I. M51)

Lyly uses in conditional statements such analogical forms as 'mightest.’
’shouldst.’ etc.. with the second person singular preterite. In 03

these verbs had no forms in -'st' in the preterite second person singular.

either indicative or subjunctive. and the enelogicel for-s first developed

152

in the indicative and were subeequently extended to the subjunctive.
Iheee statements ere clearly subjunctive in Lyly. For one t‘ing the
older forms outnumber the analogical forms in «'et' ten to one. end for

another many of the ferns are interchangeable with the formal suhnunctive.

If thou.nigheet hone thy wil. how much ground would content thee?

"(11. 3557

Indeed if thou shouldest rigze vn and downs in our iackete. thou
wouldst be thought a very tomboy (III. 122)

I would carers the crew were white. if thou.e*ouldeet but so: it (II.I33)

that wouldest then do. if thou some“: find fiance? (II. 327)

0 Cynthia. if thou.sbouldeet alwaiee continue at thy fulnes. both Gods
and men woulde conspire to reuieh thee (III. 22) .

if tnou shouldst shit often. thou wouldst call it the revue (III. 155}

If thou shouldst wish that uh tsoeuer thou.thoughtest night be lens.

*“33 Jydas chat euer he toucht night be gold. it may be lone would bee
as lothsome to thine cares. as gold is to his eyes (III. 123) ' ‘

Philentus. if thou goldeet with due considerationIggz low ferre n
courtiers lyfe is from a sound beliefs. thou vouldeet either franc thy
selfe to e new trade or els amend thine old manners (I. 308)

If thou wouldet but_germit no to talke with.thee. or by writing suffer
no at large to discourse s thee. I doubt not but 1‘. both the cause
of my loue wold be beleeued. & the sxtrenitie rewarded (II. 12%)

0 stay with him. when conquered thou hast --- If thou vouldst thinks
him worthie of thy loue (III. 365)

Farewell Diogenes. thou needest not hane scraped rootes. if thou wouldest
haue followed Alexander (II. 351)

Thou settent downe the office of a friend. which if thou couldst as well
nerforne ae thou canst describe. I soulde be as villing to confirms
our olde league. as I am to beleeue thy news lewes (II. 1kg)

If t?ou.eouldest eewell conceiue the care of a father. as I can leuel
at the nature of a childe-a-then wouldeet thou desire my life to
enioy my counsell (II. 15)

 

 

5 In statements of concession

Concessive statements are statements that specify something granted.
conceded. or acknowledged for some snecific purpose. As already indicated
concoseivs notions are indeed frecu*nt1y eXpreseed by the formal sub-

Jnnctive after such narticles as 'able.’ 'xlbeit.' 'elthough.‘ 'though.’

'so.’ 'provided.' These particles are also used with the nodal sub-
Junctive. In such cases almort any one of the modal auxiliariee occur.
To the extent that their common notion is conceseive they are interchangeable.
but they frequently exnreae different shades of the subjunctive notion.
I eFall arrange my materials. as in the case of the formal subjunctive.
according to the particles used. There is essentially no difference
tween the nreeent are the preterite forre of the auxiliaries, and when
used with the infinitive of the verb they eXprese present or future
action. Reference to past action is expressed by means of either
auxiliary plus the perfect infinitive of the verb. It should be added
that the model is much lees frequeht in such statements in Lyly than

the formal subjunctive.

Concession in Iyly is eXpreeeed by the nodal euhjunct’ve after

'alheit.' Of this usage I have only one example.

Albeit 1_een_gg_xex_anznnh.the coulee of desire with forgetfulneese.
yet will I rake then up in the ashes of modestie (I. 207)

Concession is orpreeeed by the modal subjunctive. though lees fre-

quently than by the formal. after 'although.’

And although eome shell thinke it irpertinent to the hietorie. they
shall not finde it renugnent (II. I”)

And although I cannot see in thee lesee vitte then I wee root. yet
doe I finds loose honeetie (I. 233)

Beware eoliterines. But although I woufd bane thee vse company. for thy
recreation. yet (I. 256)

so holy doth he thinke the ground heere. or IO homely the women ther.
whome although I would gladly haue with me. yet seeing I candnot, I
(II. 18E)

that Religious have beene followed before the conning of Christ. although
it would breede great delight to your cares, yet might it happily
seeme tedious (II, 191)

 

Rietreeee Lucille. although my long absence night breed; your lust
enger.(for yt loners desire nothing so much as often meeting) yet I
hone my presence will dissolue your choler (I. 23 7)

IT cheunced that this my Lady (uhome althou5h I nicht name for the louo
I tore hir. yet I will not for the reverence I one hir (11.53-5h)

Although this might sonwhat procure your liking. that doing what you
lyet shoe will not see it (11.157)

Conceseion is exPressed by the model subjunctive. though again much

less frequently than by the formal. after 'though.‘

yet as occasion shall sorus. I will shots that I haue not forgotten
any. tzough I may not rsouit one (II.186)

I shel setisfie myne own nynde. though I cannot feeds their humors. which
greatly seke after those that sift the finest meal. (I. 181)

so fit it is. that I cannot omit it for y Opportunitie of the tine.
though I might over-logo it for the besenesse of the matter (11. 39)

I must needes conclude with Philautus. though I shoulde cauill with
Euphues (II. 160)

Vicinia. thy fact is pardoned; though the lav would see it punisht
(III. 226)

And you Scintilla hee not much more then a sparks. though_you.vould be
esteemed a flame (III. 3h) .

_ztromigie tlough it could not be overcome yet it might be overhorne
(Is 0)

In the means season. thoughs myne sndovors must be emplgzed about your
sick serusnt. yet my prayers shall not cease for your cost gretiouse
Fadestie (1. MG?)

truely I an framed of that mettell. that I-oenne mortifye enye affections.
whether it bee in.drynoks or desire. so that I have no needs of your
playsters. though I must needes_gggp thankes for your puynes (II. 56)

Concession is expressed also by the modal subjunctiVI after 'so.'

Eu-hues delighted with the discourses of old Fidus. was content to here
any thing. so he might hears hie sneaks eons thing (11. nu)

Iuno for all hir ienlousie. beholding Io. wished to be no Goddesse.
so she might be sougellant (II. 59)

Concessive notions referring to post action are exorcise! by means
of the modal auxiliary plus the perfect infinitive of the verb. I have

only one example from Lyly.

155

This is that nightie Eagle. that hath throwne dust into the eyes of the
Part. that went about to worke destruction to hir suhiecte. into whose
wingee although the blinds Beetle would heue erect. and so being
carryed into hir nest. destroyed hir young ones (II. 215)

156

Chapter IV

IF'SUHEAHY

fhe evidence in the present study of Lyly's use of the subjunctive
would seem to indicate that the subjunctive in English if defined.
excluxively in terms of fern was very much more common in the late
sixteenth century than it is today but that if defined primarily in
terms of notion it is no more restricted today than it nae then.

In defining the subjunctive I have taken my one from those grammarians.
especially Sonnenschein and Gurne. who regard notion or function more
significant then form. I have considered as subjunctive any verb or verb
phrase which hypothesizes or assumes an action or state that is desirable.
possible. obligatory. strongly suggested. permiesable. conditional.
admitted. or waived. in all instances more or less uncertain or doubtful
of realization. As techniques expressive of the subjunctive notion I
recognize l) the inflectional or formal subjunctive. 2) the modal
auxiliaries. 3) indicative forms substituted for. but still functioning
as subjunctive. and 3) inverted order and perticles (both conJ active
and adverbial). Throughout the study I have refused to believe that
because the formal subjunctive has grown gradually more infrequent in
English the subjunctive ‘as a mood is any more restricted now than it
ever was either in significance or occurrence.

Concerning the uses of the subjunctive Jesoerson is probably

right. It would not. he remarks "be possible to find one formula that

should cover all the various uses of the subjunctive. . . the truth
seems to be that the subjunctive was at first vaguely used in a variety
of cases which it is impossible logically or notionnlly to delinitate
as against the use of the indicative. and.that each language took its
own course in sometimes restricting and sometimes extending its sphere

Of e:q"“1C;"X':"nt. fl 1)

The inflectional or formal subjunctive was much more common in Lyly’s
days than it is at the present time. It occurred in dependent' state-
ments of detail after verbs of viehing. etc.. in conditional statements
(ranging all the way from reelizeble to unrealizable conditions ).
in statements of obligation (both independent and donendent). in con-
ceeaive statements. in ndverbinl statements of indeterminate time. nur—
oose. limitation. or indefinite extent. In all of hhoee idioms. while
lyly used the fornal and t‘e modal subjunctive side by side. current
practice hue all but eliminated the formal. In statements of permission
the formrl subjunctive already infrequent in Lyly. surVives only in a
few stereotyped phrases. In current practice the modal auxiliaries or
substituted indicative forms have come to be used instead of the older
formal oubjunc‘ive. even in Lyly‘e time the nodal\1et' was such more

frequent in statements of exhortetion than the inflected subjunctive form.

Tie significance of this change in usage has‘been frequently nie-
interpreted. One needs to remember that only in the second and third
persons singular of the present tense. and in the case of ‘to be' of the

preterite tense as well. is the formal subjunciive differentiated in for:

 

I) Otto Jasperson. The ?hilosophy of Grannrr. po. 317-13}.

158

fray the iniioafilve. In all other instances. in Iyly'a time as new. the
form can ‘ne rlevelcmed from the older indicative or the older subjunctive.
If in the patterns mentioned in the preceding; paragramh; nerticmlerly

in. conditional statements. a verb form in the eeccnd or third. singular
is interpreted as subjunctive. there would. be no question of the tub-
Junctive character of nerellel forms in the plural or in the first
singular where the iniicative and subjunctive forms have leveled.
Identity of form does not eliminate the possibility that a. verb may in
me efiprcseion be indicative and in another eubjunctive. So interpreted

the form-11 subjunctive has a greater frzqnencx' in mirrent practice then

is generatly indicated in the harfihcnke.

Since the subjunctive has come to express aspect more then anything
else. it ignore: largelr - and. did go even in Lyly'e time - en: die-
tinctiono of time or tense. Certainly ’vould' and 'vere.’ originally
preteritee,do not how in subjunctive statements refer to action in
the past. The handbook. are somewhat restrictive. to of, the least, in
insisting on ‘were' in conditional and other statements contrary to
fact. They say nothing; of other pro terites in parallel idioms. Cor-
minly 'hnd‘ in 'he said if he had the book he'd let no have it’ is as
much subjunctive as "wero‘ in 'if I were.‘ 5he feet is probably that the
subjunctive; ignoring the ordinary tense distinctions. came to nee the
present to express mre likely and. the preterite to expreen less likely
act' on or state. And. the distinction between the more and the lone likely
is not no clear cut as the hz‘mibooks would. have us suppose from their
remarks on 'wero.’ Certainly in innereonel statements of moral or logical

necessity 'vere' is equivalent to the node]. 'vonld be.‘

159

In practically all of these types of the subjunctive Lyly'emnloye
occasionally indicative substitutions and very frequently the model
auxiliaries. In current practice indicative substitution: end.model neoge
are equally comron end t3e formal subjunctive has of course all but

disappeared. Indicative substitutions do not imply. contrary to the

general belief, leveling of mood but only leveling of form.

The modal subjunctive was already well established by Lyly‘e time.
It had one advantage ovar the older formal subjunctive in that it euoplied
the means of expressing the cane notions with finer gradation: of mean-
ing and. in the once of 'cnn' and 'conld.’ notions that could never be
expressed erccpt by the auriliary. In practically all the idioms where
he used the formal subjunctive Lyly could use. ani did on other occasions
use. the moanl. The only excegtion in in the case of grecttncc where
even yet there is no moinl equivaicnt. In all other instances there
can be little question that Lyly regarded the formal and the modal
subjunctive: as interchangeable. Actnnlly in some t?p88, as for example
in statements of exhortetion in the first person and of permission. he
seemed to prefer the model. on? of couree in 'can' anfi 'could‘ statements

there Ens than as now no formal equivalent.

In conditional statements. where current practico generally has sub—-
etituted indicative force. lyly need the model 'ehell' or 'vill‘ or the
formal. Ee said ’if he come.‘ or 'if he shell(vill) come.‘ but very
rorely"if he cores.‘ There can be no pucsticn that in such statements
‘etall(till) core' is equiVLlent to the formafrcone': Lyly ucee the two
interchangeably. The inclicetione are interesting. For one thing the

auxiliariee 'ehell' and 'vill’ are primarily colorleee symbols of mood

160

and mat of time. For 319ther lyly uses either forticle without reference
to per'on and thus offers no surrort for the c nvcnticnal distinction

in usage between 'shnll' and 'vill.‘ Of tte two particleq 'ehell' ie
Uzdworo comjletely colorlosc; 'will‘ can be interpreted as retaining some-

t'ing of its original m axing-

It 13 difficult to any c tegorically row for the modal auxiliaries re-
tained their original m'anings in Lyly; Certainly 'would' as a.finits verb
was more frecuent than than it is now. The most colorless of the
particles is perhaps 'sha11.' 'ficy' and'might’ could at times calily
be understood in thoir original meaning. but Lyly used them also in their
teakened meaning. From the frequent occurrence of 'needs lust.' side by
side with 'must.' I infer that 'nnst' had not fully reached its current
meaning: the adverbial particle 'noede' was still needed to enforce the

meaning of obligation.

161

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Abbott. E. A.. A Shakesnearian Grammar . Rey York. 1869. Tfiird ed. Re-
printed 1883

Aiken. Janei 3.. English. Past and.Present. New York. 1930
.... A.Kew'P1an o(_Eng;}eh Grammar. New York. 1933

Allen. Don Cameron. ”Neptune'e ’Agar' 1n Lyly'e‘gallathea.' Hodern Lauggggg
Eotee. XLIX (193k). h51.h52

Allen. Edward A.. “The Subjunctive 1n Englleh.' Education. VIII (1887).
185-185

A New English Dictionarzion Historical Principles. ed. A. H. Murray and
others. 11 vole.. Oxford. 1883-1933

fitkiue. J. H. 3.. "Elizabethan Prone Fiction." The Canbridgg_fiietory of
Engliah Literature (New York. 1911). III. 386:399

Aurner. R. 3.. "History of Certain Aspects of the Structure of the English
3entence.’ Philelosical quartergr. II (1923). 19h

Baker. Ernest 5.. 'Lyly'e Eunhuee.' The History of the Eagliah Novq; (10
vols.. London. 192k-39). II. 57-66

Beviar. Thyra Jane. “American Use of the Subjunotive.' tmerican Sneech.
V1 (1931). 207-215

Bradley. Henry. The HEEEEE of figgli .Hew York. 1915
Brightland. John. A Grammar of the lien To . London. 1759

Brown. Gould. The Institute: of Englieh Grammar. Stereotype ed.. New
York. 1851

Brown. Jamee.ran Exogesie of English Syntax. Philadelphia. ISHO

Callaway. Morgan. Jr.. The Consecutive sugjunotive in Old Egalieh.
Monograph Series No. IV. Nodern Language Association of America.
Boston. 1933 ’

Champneye. A. 0.. History of English. Rev York. 1893

ACrombie. Alexander. The Etyrolggz;and Syntax of’the Ehglleh Language.
London. 1802

162

Carlo. George 0.. College English Grammar. Richmond. Virginia. 1925

--- 'The Porno and.runctione of the Subjunctive in the Classical and
Modern Languages.“ Modern Philologz. 1171 (1929). 337-399

---- 'Hae English a Future?I Journal of Englieh and Germanic Philologz.
III (1913). 513-139

--~ 'Hueinge upon the English and the Germanic Suhjnnctivc.' Journal of
‘Englieh and Germanic Philologz. XXX (1931). 1-5

-....garte of Speech and Accidence. Boston. 1935
t“
..... .mtax. m 1931

Pernald. James 0.. A Vorking Grammar of the English Lanlgggg. flew York.
1908 .

.... Historic Engligh. New York. 1936

Field. H. 1.. I'Gompara.tive Syntax and Some Modern Theories of the Sub-
Junctive." Hodern Hmong. mm (1925). 201.2%

Fowler. Henry Wateon. Subjnnctive. flxford. 199M '

Fowler. H.W.. and Fowler. 3.6.. Ehe King'efiEngligg, Oxford. 1906
Fowler. W 11am Chauncey. English Grammar. New York. 1868
Frans. Vilheln. ghekespeare —Grammatg§. Third ed.. Kalle. l92h

Friee. Charles 0.. “The Periphraetic Future with Shall and Will.'Puhlicationg
of the Hodcrn Language Association, XL (1925;. 963-1025

-—- The Teachig5_of the EQELEEE_EEESEEEEJ Beu'Ycrk. 1927

Garnett. Jane: M.. 'Notee on ElizabethaniPreee.’ Publications of the
Modern LRQEEEE? Association. 11 (1896). hl-Gl

Gorrell. J.. Hendren. “Indirect Discourse in Angle-Saxon.”oznhlicatione
of the Modern Lagggggg Association. I (1895). h37-hh2

Grattan. J. H. G.. and Gurrey. P.. Our Living Langgggg, London. 1925

Haile. Charles 3.. Shall and Will and the English Subjnnctive. Richmond.
Indiana. 1915

Hale. William Gardner. “The Harmrnizing of Grammatical Eonenclature. with
Especial Reference to Mood-Syntax.“ Publication. of the Modern
W Association. an (1911). 37m .

Hall. John Leelie. Englieh Usage. Chicago. 1917

HelnoholtcéPhelen. Augueta. ”The Staging of the Court Drama to 1595.“
Publication3;ef the Modern Langggge Association. 3117 (1909).
198-203

House. B. 0.. and Harman. S. E.. Descriptive Engligh Grammar. Bow York.

1931

Jaspersen. (tto.;§gsentiale of English Grammar. 50% York. 1933
.... Grouth.and Structure of the English Language. Leipzig. 1905

---«- A Modern English Grammar on Historical Princiglee. Part IV. 512' taxz’fi'memdfl’enge'
Heidelberg. 1931

--- She Philoecnhy of GrammarI New York. 192%

Kaeten. William. An Inquiry into the Use of the Sub‘unctive Hood in.the
English of the Elizabethan Period. Hanover. 187h

Fellner.Leon.Ԥistorica1 Outline; of English Syntax. New York. 1892

Kittredge. George 1.. and Farley. Frank E.. An Advanced English Grammar.
Boston. 1913

Krapp. George P.. Elements of Egalieh Grammar. New York. 1908
-—- The Knowledge of Egglidh. Eev‘Ycrk. 1927
-- Modern English._1te Growth and Present Uee. Hev'Ycrk. 1910

Kruieinga. 3.. A Handbook 0;:Preeent Dal Englieh.‘Part II. Egglidh
incidence and Syntax. Fourth ed.. 3 vole.. Utrecht. 1925

Lee. Sidney. ed.. “John Lyly.“ Dictionary of National Biogganh;,(flev
York. 1893). XXXIV. 327-332

Lloyd. Charlee Allen. 'Ie the Subjunctive Dyingt' Ehe Enslieh JournAI.
XXVI (1937). 369~373 '

Long. Percy N.. “The Purport of Lyly’e Endinion.‘ Publicatione of the
Modern Language Association. XXIV (1909). 169.1

Lyly. John. Complete yorke. ed. R. Herrick Bond. 3 vole.. Oxford. 1902
kcxnight. George Harley. Modern English in the Making. New York. 1928

HcKnight. 0.3.. Haber. F. 3.. and Hatfield. H. 8.,A Grammar of Living}
Englieh. Kev York. 1939

Neeoh. Sanford. B.. 'Early Application of Latin Grammar to Englieh.'
Publicationg_of the Modern Language Association. L (1935). 1615}

Kerrie. Richard. Edementary Leseons infifiistorical Grammar. Eondon. 187k
hurray. Lind1ey. bdgliah Grammor. raw Yank. 1795
Eesfield. J. 0.. English Grammar. Peat agg_fizggggj. London. 192k

Onions. Charles Talbot. An Advanced English Syntax. Fifth ed.. Iew York.

1929
Perrin. Porter 0.. An Index to Buggigh. Chicago. 1939

Poutema. H.. §;§rammer of Late Modern Eng;1¢h, Part 11. The Enti- n!
5153223: 3 Vols-o Grouingfin. 1911-1926"'

hf e
.... Hood and ?ense of the English Verb. ‘ “1 1922
Raueey. Samuel. The English Language and E glixh Grammar. Kev York. 1892

Reed. Alonzo. and Kellogg. Brninerd..gigher Lessons in Englieh. Bee
York. 1913

Ringer. Killian. 'The Immediate Source of Eughuien.“ Publicationg_of the
modern Languaho AcaOCILtion. L 111 (1938). 679.631

Sétzler. C. 3.. "why not a Future Subjunctiver' flodern ngfiggge thee.
1x11! (1908). 2&3.2uu

Shorter Oxford Enfigieh Dictionary on Elgtorical Principlee. noticed
and Edited by C.T.Onions. 2 7013.. Second ed.. Oxford. 1936

Sieeon. Cherles Jasper. Thomas Lodge and Other Elizabethzne. ed..O.J.
Sieaon. Cambridge. 1933

Smart. H.1ter Kay. Engliah Review Grammar. Revieed ed.. Hev York. 1930

Smith. 0. Alphonso. “The Earliest Occurrence in English of the Indicative
in an Unreal Condition.“ Modern Language Notes. 111 (190k). 32

Smith. Homer. ”Pastoral Influence in the English Drama." .gpblicetione
or the fiodcrn Language Association . XII (1897). 377

Sonnenechein. Edward Adolf. A New ?nglish Grammar. Oxford. 1932

 

....... The Soul of Grammar. Second ed.. Cambridge. 1929

Sngden. gerbert w.._§he Grammar of Spenser'e Faerie Cueene. Philadelphia.
193

1(:

Sweet. Henry. A How Tnglish Gramrar. (logical and Historical). Part I.
Introduction. Phonologx._and accidence. Oxford. 1892

-~- A Kev Enniish Grammar.(Locic31 and Eistnrical). Iart II. °“ntax.
Oxford. 1898. Reprinted 1931

—--- A Short Historical 3nglieh Grammar. Oxford. 1892

Symond. John Addington. Shakespeare's Predeoeesore. London. l92h

Tilley. Kerrie Palmer. Elizabethan Proverb Lore in gzlz‘e pnphuee and
in Pettie's Petite Palace. Rev York. 92

ward. Adolphus billiam. English Dramatic Literature to the Death of
Queen Anne. second ed.. 3 vole.. London. 1899

 

 

were. B.M.. ”John Lyly and the Office of the hotels.“ Review of Engligh
Studies. V (192“). 57—59

Few International Dictionary'of the English Language. Second ed.. ed.
William Allan Heileon. Thomas A. knott. and Paul W. Gerhart.
Springfield. Massachusetts. 1937

figbster. anh. A Grnrmnticcl Institute of the fhglioh Lengngge. Part 11.
Hartford. 17

wright. Joseph. and Elizabeth Mary. 5n monetary Historical Few Rennie
Grammar. London. 1898. 192L

vyld. Henry Cecil. A History of Modern Colloquial Ehrlich. Iondon.
1920

“nu-The Growth of English. London. 1901 '
-... ??3_F9§'3'331 Dictionary of the Englieh Language. London. 1931

Zieglschmid. A. J. 1.. ”The Historical DeveIOpnent of the Peat Snbjunctive
in German.” gpnrnal of English and Germanic Philclogz. XXII (1930).

372~375 ‘

.m“ut~w .0

 

 

' '0 I ‘ ‘. H ' . 1.
a ‘ v 3"? -.' .. I I} ‘u‘.o.‘b"‘? '.

«c I

I? .. 71:1}
.7 W .3'
5‘

7 x.
3

I.

.27 K 'Iv',~.

{VIM ',‘

‘.I \ ',V’

s 'I '

1.. 91:. .vaairm . I '* '

v. L. ‘3 " .r' v!‘ .I‘ ' J!

. ' r1 .5. n I’
\. "£57! .

n.~‘£",'.' . |.

. a.

R31"
1" 5
’2

n J' ’1‘- Il ' ".fi' .2"; I‘ L'. of; -" ' '
I “g. r .E”; .4}, in: j." .’ 'L : v‘ , . I
7' 7 a} ”Mk. « I ' ‘ f
' . s: ("‘1' . $‘.

v
I I

. A164" ff .:;»a'¢*.',3'§ u ' ' Fr“.-
- gun 1“!» 1e

, i
I:

w
fgd.‘

,. 41; ‘ _ ~

.. I.

. x" in!

n ‘ 1‘" ‘i 3' I" .
- x » ,t$‘.g'r ’3. 4% .. “Italy/U": ‘ -’ K ’4‘
$4} T4??? _. H W.
, . I . "I"
:1»!

I
>5,
-.\I'.-.   , ""“’
.4. w».
I. ' ’3' of '1' .i 9131:?”
"‘34? '. ’21... 1". -' x
. :‘u’vié‘f:

u
"
u
"U.
,
' ‘

gidr TI“ MW ~
I... t .’
$$H~ W, '
(."f i ‘rl: “
1.36:?" wig}!
. {a ‘I

‘
r: 2‘. {HA-f
a. v"

I“

0 ’ _.o
i .

1 —
1 " ’ - -.
nan- » 3 -

., y.

’ . I - i I
1' . ,‘» "O a l u C
l ‘ '
A ..I ‘

3’ g.
. ‘ , in *““

l

v
u.‘
I
.
' T. - .A‘
. .., ‘
. . - ‘ ‘7‘ ‘
fl 1‘“. 4“
. ‘ . . ‘e
A U I. . 'I "

C.
< O.”
. 1‘ -‘
J
. «,

l

_‘|
f
o

\

it
u ‘v'.

.i-
(Ii. ..

.\) 7

.‘ii.

.(
'C"
I C
g‘,«5
, -
v. ~ . b-l
._ .’i
u‘ .‘ 7 "
. . . A.
i 1*“.
. 9' ... |
,_ . n
: we
". .' "y
'.;.“....
._-'. -.. A'.‘
. ‘ ‘- . '
. o.‘
. .
.,‘ ,' .7
_u. ._ u
v~ .
_"~
. t
l. -_
r " ‘1
. L .“
.‘I “" ‘
.
- I a , -.'
as '.
I ‘ .' "I
. ‘4 - ‘-
4 o'. ,' “
- - .
g Q
-.1'
\
.‘-. r
‘ r
. .
.
I
)

 

 

 

 

l'i

O .Qr'

a .la .
Q. .‘Ull U.

HICHIGQN STATE UNIV. LIBRQRIES

Hill
1

III"! III! lllll Ill llll IIUHIII
9 1

312 30184 342